Gentoo Archives: gentoo-doc-cvs

From: swift <swift@×××××××××××.org>
To: gentoo-doc-cvs@l.g.o
Subject: [gentoo-doc-cvs] cvs commit: handbook-alpha.xml
Date: Mon, 08 Aug 2005 13:16:49
Message-Id: 200508081316.j78DG4rn022902@robin.gentoo.org
1 swift 05/08/08 13:16:10
2
3 Added: xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1 handbook-alpha.xml
4 handbook-amd64.xml handbook-hppa.xml
5 handbook-ppc.xml handbook-sparc.xml
6 handbook-x86.xml hb-install-about.xml
7 hb-install-alpha-bootloader.xml
8 hb-install-alpha-disk.xml
9 hb-install-alpha-kernel.xml
10 hb-install-alpha-medium.xml
11 hb-install-amd64-bootloader.xml
12 hb-install-amd64-disk.xml
13 hb-install-amd64-kernel.xml
14 hb-install-amd64-medium.xml hb-install-config.xml
15 hb-install-finalise.xml
16 hb-install-hppa-bootloader.xml
17 hb-install-hppa-disk.xml hb-install-hppa-kernel.xml
18 hb-install-hppa-medium.xml hb-install-network.xml
19 hb-install-next.xml hb-install-ppc-bootloader.xml
20 hb-install-ppc-disk.xml hb-install-ppc-kernel.xml
21 hb-install-ppc-medium.xml
22 hb-install-sparc-bootloader.xml
23 hb-install-sparc-disk.xml
24 hb-install-sparc-kernel.xml
25 hb-install-sparc-medium.xml hb-install-stage.xml
26 hb-install-system.xml hb-install-tools.xml
27 hb-install-x86-bootloader.xml
28 hb-install-x86-disk.xml hb-install-x86-kernel.xml
29 hb-install-x86-medium.xml index.xml
30 Log:
31 Adding 2005.0 (yes, .0) as a plain copy (makes it easier for translators to update
32
33 Revision Changes Path
34 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-alpha.xml
35
36 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-alpha.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
37 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-alpha.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
38
39 Index: handbook-alpha.xml
40 ===================================================================
41 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
42 <!DOCTYPE book SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
43
44 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-alpha.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:09 swift Exp $ -->
45
46 <book link="handbook-alpha.xml">
47 <title>Gentoo Linux 2005.0 Alpha Handbook</title>
48
49 <author title="Author">
50 <mail link="swift@g.o">Sven Vermeulen</mail>
51 </author>
52 <author title="Author">
53 <mail link="uberlord@g.o">Roy Marples</mail>
54 </author>
55 <author title="Author">
56 <mail link="drobbins@g.o">Daniel Robbins</mail>
57 </author>
58 <author title="Author">
59 <mail link="chouser@g.o">Chris Houser</mail>
60 </author>
61 <author title="Author">
62 <mail link="jerry@g.o">Jerry Alexandratos</mail>
63 </author>
64 <author title="Gentoo x86 Developer">
65 <mail link="seemant@g.o">Seemant Kulleen</mail>
66 </author>
67 <author title="Gentoo Alpha Developer">
68 <mail link="taviso@g.o">Tavis Ormandy</mail>
69 </author><!-- Does not want to be listed on the rendered page
70 <author title="Gentoo Developer">
71 Aron Griffis
72 </author>
73 -->
74 <author title="Gentoo AMD64 Developer">
75 <mail link="jhuebel@g.o">Jason Huebel</mail>
76 </author>
77 <author title="Gentoo HPPA developer">
78 <mail link="gmsoft@g.o">Guy Martin</mail>
79 </author>
80 <author title="Gentoo PPC developer">
81 <mail link="pvdabeel@g.o">Pieter Van den Abeele</mail>
82 </author>
83 <author title="Gentoo SPARC developer">
84 <mail link="blademan@g.o">Joe Kallar</mail>
85 </author>
86 <author title="Editor">
87 <mail link="zhen@g.o">John P. Davis</mail>
88 </author>
89 <author title="Editor">Pierre-Henri Jondot</author>
90 <author title="Editor">
91 <mail link="stocke2@g.o">Eric Stockbridge</mail>
92 </author>
93 <author title="Editor">
94 <mail link="rajiv@g.o">Rajiv Manglani</mail>
95 </author>
96 <author title="Editor">
97 <mail link="seo@g.o">Jungmin Seo</mail>
98 </author>
99 <author title="Editor">
100 <mail link="zhware@g.o">Stoyan Zhekov</mail>
101 </author>
102 <author title="Editor">
103 <mail link="jhhudso@g.o">Jared Hudson</mail>
104 </author>
105 <author title="Editor">
106 <mail link="peitolm@g.o">Colin Morey</mail>
107 </author>
108 <author title="Editor">
109 <mail link="peesh@g.o">Jorge Paulo</mail>
110 </author>
111 <author title="Editor">
112 <mail link="carl@g.o">Carl Anderson</mail>
113 </author>
114 <author title="Editor">
115 <mail link="avenj@g.o">Jon Portnoy</mail>
116 </author>
117 <author title="Editor">
118 <mail link="klasikahl@g.o">Zack Gilburd</mail>
119 </author>
120 <author title="Editor">
121 <mail link="jmorgan@g.o">Jack Morgan</mail>
122 </author>
123 <author title="Editor">
124 <mail link="bennyc@g.o">Benny Chuang</mail>
125 </author>
126 <author title="Editor">
127 <mail link="erwin@g.o">Erwin</mail>
128 </author>
129 <author title="Editor">
130 <mail link="kumba@g.o">Joshua Kinard</mail>
131 </author>
132 <author title="Editor">
133 <mail link="dertobi123@g.o">Tobias Scherbaum</mail>
134 </author>
135 <author title="Reviewer">
136 <mail link="g2boojum@g.o">Grant Goodyear</mail>
137 </author>
138 <author title="Reviewer">
139 <mail link="gerrynjr@g.o">Gerald J. Normandin Jr.</mail>
140 </author>
141 <author title="Reviewer">
142 <mail link="spyderous@g.o">Donnie Berkholz</mail>
143 </author>
144 <author title="Reviewer">
145 <mail link="antifa@g.o">Ken Nowack</mail>
146 </author>
147 <author title="Contributor">
148 <mail link="pylon@g.o">Lars Weiler</mail>
149 </author>
150
151 <abstract>
152 This is the Gentoo Handbook, an effort to centralise Gentoo/Linux
153 information.
154 </abstract>
155
156 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
157 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0 -->
158 <license/>
159
160 <version>4.1</version>
161 <date>2005-06-09</date>
162
163 <part>
164 <title>Installing Gentoo</title>
165 <abstract>
166 In this part you learn how to install Gentoo on your system.
167 </abstract>
168
169 <chapter>
170 <title>About the Gentoo Linux Installation</title>
171 <abstract>
172 Users not familiar with Gentoo do not always know that choice is what
173 Gentoo is all about.
174 </abstract>
175 <include href="hb-install-about.xml"/>
176 </chapter>
177
178 <chapter>
179 <title>Booting the Universal Installation CD</title>
180 <abstract>
181 Using our Universal Installation CD you can boot up your system into a running
182 environment that allows you to install Gentoo.
183 </abstract>
184 <include href="hb-install-alpha-medium.xml"/>
185 </chapter>
186
187 <chapter>
188 <title>Configuring your Network</title>
189 <abstract>
190 If you need networking, this is the place where the network (and Internet
191 connection) is configured.
192 </abstract>
193 <include href="hb-install-network.xml"/>
194 </chapter>
195
196 <chapter>
197 <title>Preparing the Disks</title>
198 <abstract>
199 To be able to install Gentoo, you must create the necessary partitions.
200 This chapter describes how to partition a disk for future usage.
201 </abstract>
202 <include href="hb-install-alpha-disk.xml"/>
203 </chapter>
204
205 <chapter>
206 <title>Installing the Gentoo Installation Files</title>
207 <abstract>
208 In this chapter we describe how you extract a stage3 file and how to configure
209 Portage.
210 </abstract>
211 <include href="hb-install-stage.xml"/>
212 </chapter>
213
214 <chapter>
215 <title>Chrooting into the Gentoo Base System</title>
216 <abstract>
217 Now that the stage3 file is extracted, we chroot into the new system and modify
218 the USE variable.
219 </abstract>
220 <include href="hb-install-system.xml"/>
221 </chapter>
222
223 <chapter>
224 <title>Configuring the Kernel</title>
225 <abstract>
226 The Linux kernel is the core of every distribution. This chapter
227 explains how to configure your kernel.
228 </abstract>
229 <include href="hb-install-alpha-kernel.xml"/>
230 </chapter>
231
232 <chapter>
233 <title>Configuring your System</title>
234 <abstract>
235 You need to edit some important configuration files. In this chapter
236 you receive an overview of these files and an explanation on how to
237 proceed.
238 </abstract>
239 <include href="hb-install-config.xml"/>
240
241
242
243 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-amd64.xml
244
245 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-amd64.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
246 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-amd64.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
247
248 Index: handbook-amd64.xml
249 ===================================================================
250 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
251 <!DOCTYPE book SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
252
253 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-amd64.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:09 swift Exp $ -->
254
255 <book link="handbook-amd64.xml">
256 <title>Gentoo Linux 2005.0 AMD64 Handbook</title>
257
258 <author title="Author">
259 <mail link="swift@g.o">Sven Vermeulen</mail>
260 </author>
261 <author title="Author">
262 <mail link="uberlord@g.o">Roy Marples</mail>
263 </author>
264 <author title="Author">
265 <mail link="drobbins@g.o">Daniel Robbins</mail>
266 </author>
267 <author title="Author">
268 <mail link="chouser@g.o">Chris Houser</mail>
269 </author>
270 <author title="Author">
271 <mail link="jerry@g.o">Jerry Alexandratos</mail>
272 </author>
273 <author title="Gentoo x86 Developer">
274 <mail link="seemant@g.o">Seemant Kulleen</mail>
275 </author>
276 <author title="Gentoo Alpha Developer">
277 <mail link="taviso@g.o">Tavis Ormandy</mail>
278 </author><!-- Does not want to be listed on the rendered page
279 <author title="Gentoo Developer">
280 Aron Griffis
281 </author>
282 -->
283 <author title="Gentoo AMD64 Developer">
284 <mail link="jhuebel@g.o">Jason Huebel</mail>
285 </author>
286 <author title="Gentoo HPPA developer">
287 <mail link="gmsoft@g.o">Guy Martin</mail>
288 </author>
289 <author title="Gentoo PPC developer">
290 <mail link="pvdabeel@g.o">Pieter Van den Abeele</mail>
291 </author>
292 <author title="Gentoo SPARC developer">
293 <mail link="blademan@g.o">Joe Kallar</mail>
294 </author>
295 <author title="Editor">
296 <mail link="zhen@g.o">John P. Davis</mail>
297 </author>
298 <author title="Editor">Pierre-Henri Jondot</author>
299 <author title="Editor">
300 <mail link="stocke2@g.o">Eric Stockbridge</mail>
301 </author>
302 <author title="Editor">
303 <mail link="rajiv@g.o">Rajiv Manglani</mail>
304 </author>
305 <author title="Editor">
306 <mail link="seo@g.o">Jungmin Seo</mail>
307 </author>
308 <author title="Editor">
309 <mail link="zhware@g.o">Stoyan Zhekov</mail>
310 </author>
311 <author title="Editor">
312 <mail link="jhhudso@g.o">Jared Hudson</mail>
313 </author>
314 <author title="Editor">
315 <mail link="peitolm@g.o">Colin Morey</mail>
316 </author>
317 <author title="Editor">
318 <mail link="peesh@g.o">Jorge Paulo</mail>
319 </author>
320 <author title="Editor">
321 <mail link="carl@g.o">Carl Anderson</mail>
322 </author>
323 <author title="Editor">
324 <mail link="avenj@g.o">Jon Portnoy</mail>
325 </author>
326 <author title="Editor">
327 <mail link="klasikahl@g.o">Zack Gilburd</mail>
328 </author>
329 <author title="Editor">
330 <mail link="jmorgan@g.o">Jack Morgan</mail>
331 </author>
332 <author title="Editor">
333 <mail link="bennyc@g.o">Benny Chuang</mail>
334 </author>
335 <author title="Editor">
336 <mail link="erwin@g.o">Erwin</mail>
337 </author>
338 <author title="Editor">
339 <mail link="kumba@g.o">Joshua Kinard</mail>
340 </author>
341 <author title="Editor">
342 <mail link="dertobi123@g.o">Tobias Scherbaum</mail>
343 </author>
344 <author title="Reviewer">
345 <mail link="g2boojum@g.o">Grant Goodyear</mail>
346 </author>
347 <author title="Reviewer">
348 <mail link="gerrynjr@g.o">Gerald J. Normandin Jr.</mail>
349 </author>
350 <author title="Reviewer">
351 <mail link="spyderous@g.o">Donnie Berkholz</mail>
352 </author>
353 <author title="Reviewer">
354 <mail link="antifa@g.o">Ken Nowack</mail>
355 </author>
356 <author title="Contributor">
357 <mail link="pylon@g.o">Lars Weiler</mail>
358 </author>
359
360 <abstract>
361 This is the Gentoo Handbook, an effort to centralise Gentoo/Linux
362 information.
363 </abstract>
364
365 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
366 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0 -->
367 <license/>
368
369 <version>4.1</version>
370 <date>2005-06-09</date>
371
372 <part>
373 <title>Installing Gentoo</title>
374 <abstract>
375 In this part you learn how to install Gentoo on your system.
376 </abstract>
377
378 <chapter>
379 <title>About the Gentoo Linux Installation</title>
380 <abstract>
381 Users not familiar with Gentoo do not always know that choice is what
382 Gentoo is all about.
383 </abstract>
384 <include href="hb-install-about.xml"/>
385 </chapter>
386
387 <chapter>
388 <title>Booting the Universal Installation CD</title>
389 <abstract>
390 Using our Universal Installation CD you can boot up your system into a running
391 environment that allows you to install Gentoo.
392 </abstract>
393 <include href="hb-install-amd64-medium.xml"/>
394 </chapter>
395
396 <chapter>
397 <title>Configuring your Network</title>
398 <abstract>
399 If you need networking, this is the place where the network (and Internet
400 connection) is configured.
401 </abstract>
402 <include href="hb-install-network.xml"/>
403 </chapter>
404
405 <chapter>
406 <title>Preparing the Disks</title>
407 <abstract>
408 To be able to install Gentoo, you must create the necessary partitions.
409 This chapter describes how to partition a disk for future usage.
410 </abstract>
411 <include href="hb-install-amd64-disk.xml"/>
412 </chapter>
413
414 <chapter>
415 <title>Installing the Gentoo Installation Files</title>
416 <abstract>
417 In this chapter we describe how you extract a stage3 file and how to configure
418 Portage.
419 </abstract>
420 <include href="hb-install-stage.xml"/>
421 </chapter>
422
423 <chapter>
424 <title>Chrooting into the Gentoo Base System</title>
425 <abstract>
426 Now that the stage3 file is extracted, we chroot into the new system and modify
427 the USE variable.
428 </abstract>
429 <include href="hb-install-system.xml"/>
430 </chapter>
431
432 <chapter>
433 <title>Configuring the Kernel</title>
434 <abstract>
435 The Linux kernel is the core of every distribution. This chapter
436 explains how to configure your kernel.
437 </abstract>
438 <include href="hb-install-amd64-kernel.xml"/>
439 </chapter>
440
441 <chapter>
442 <title>Configuring your System</title>
443 <abstract>
444 You need to edit some important configuration files. In this chapter
445 you receive an overview of these files and an explanation on how to
446 proceed.
447 </abstract>
448 <include href="hb-install-config.xml"/>
449
450
451
452 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-hppa.xml
453
454 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-hppa.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
455 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-hppa.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
456
457 Index: handbook-hppa.xml
458 ===================================================================
459 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
460 <!DOCTYPE book SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
461
462 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-hppa.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
463
464 <book link="handbook-hppa.xml">
465 <title>Gentoo Linux 2005.0 HPPA Handbook</title>
466
467 <author title="Author">
468 <mail link="swift@g.o">Sven Vermeulen</mail>
469 </author>
470 <author title="Author">
471 <mail link="uberlord@g.o">Roy Marples</mail>
472 </author>
473 <author title="Author">
474 <mail link="drobbins@g.o">Daniel Robbins</mail>
475 </author>
476 <author title="Author">
477 <mail link="chouser@g.o">Chris Houser</mail>
478 </author>
479 <author title="Author">
480 <mail link="jerry@g.o">Jerry Alexandratos</mail>
481 </author>
482 <author title="Gentoo x86 Developer">
483 <mail link="seemant@g.o">Seemant Kulleen</mail>
484 </author>
485 <author title="Gentoo Alpha Developer">
486 <mail link="taviso@g.o">Tavis Ormandy</mail>
487 </author><!-- Does not want to be listed on the rendered page
488 <author title="Gentoo Developer">
489 Aron Griffis
490 </author>
491 -->
492 <author title="Gentoo AMD64 Developer">
493 <mail link="jhuebel@g.o">Jason Huebel</mail>
494 </author>
495 <author title="Gentoo HPPA developer">
496 <mail link="gmsoft@g.o">Guy Martin</mail>
497 </author>
498 <author title="Gentoo PPC developer">
499 <mail link="pvdabeel@g.o">Pieter Van den Abeele</mail>
500 </author>
501 <author title="Gentoo SPARC developer">
502 <mail link="blademan@g.o">Joe Kallar</mail>
503 </author>
504 <author title="Editor">
505 <mail link="zhen@g.o">John P. Davis</mail>
506 </author>
507 <author title="Editor">Pierre-Henri Jondot</author>
508 <author title="Editor">
509 <mail link="stocke2@g.o">Eric Stockbridge</mail>
510 </author>
511 <author title="Editor">
512 <mail link="rajiv@g.o">Rajiv Manglani</mail>
513 </author>
514 <author title="Editor">
515 <mail link="seo@g.o">Jungmin Seo</mail>
516 </author>
517 <author title="Editor">
518 <mail link="zhware@g.o">Stoyan Zhekov</mail>
519 </author>
520 <author title="Editor">
521 <mail link="jhhudso@g.o">Jared Hudson</mail>
522 </author>
523 <author title="Editor">
524 <mail link="peitolm@g.o">Colin Morey</mail>
525 </author>
526 <author title="Editor">
527 <mail link="peesh@g.o">Jorge Paulo</mail>
528 </author>
529 <author title="Editor">
530 <mail link="carl@g.o">Carl Anderson</mail>
531 </author>
532 <author title="Editor">
533 <mail link="avenj@g.o">Jon Portnoy</mail>
534 </author>
535 <author title="Editor">
536 <mail link="klasikahl@g.o">Zack Gilburd</mail>
537 </author>
538 <author title="Editor">
539 <mail link="jmorgan@g.o">Jack Morgan</mail>
540 </author>
541 <author title="Editor">
542 <mail link="bennyc@g.o">Benny Chuang</mail>
543 </author>
544 <author title="Editor">
545 <mail link="erwin@g.o">Erwin</mail>
546 </author>
547 <author title="Editor">
548 <mail link="kumba@g.o">Joshua Kinard</mail>
549 </author>
550 <author title="Editor">
551 <mail link="dertobi123@g.o">Tobias Scherbaum</mail>
552 </author>
553 <author title="Reviewer">
554 <mail link="g2boojum@g.o">Grant Goodyear</mail>
555 </author>
556 <author title="Reviewer">
557 <mail link="gerrynjr@g.o">Gerald J. Normandin Jr.</mail>
558 </author>
559 <author title="Reviewer">
560 <mail link="spyderous@g.o">Donnie Berkholz</mail>
561 </author>
562 <author title="Reviewer">
563 <mail link="antifa@g.o">Ken Nowack</mail>
564 </author>
565 <author title="Contributor">
566 <mail link="pylon@g.o">Lars Weiler</mail>
567 </author>
568
569 <abstract>
570 This is the Gentoo Handbook, an effort to centralise Gentoo/Linux
571 information.
572 </abstract>
573
574 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
575 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0 -->
576 <license/>
577
578 <version>4.1</version>
579 <date>2005-06-09</date>
580
581 <part>
582 <title>Installing Gentoo</title>
583 <abstract>
584 In this part you learn how to install Gentoo on your system.
585 </abstract>
586
587 <chapter>
588 <title>About the Gentoo Linux Installation</title>
589 <abstract>
590 Users not familiar with Gentoo do not always know that choice is what
591 Gentoo is all about.
592 </abstract>
593 <include href="hb-install-about.xml"/>
594 </chapter>
595
596 <chapter>
597 <title>Booting the Universal Installation CD</title>
598 <abstract>
599 Using our Universal Installation CD you can boot up your system into a running
600 environment that allows you to install Gentoo.
601 </abstract>
602 <include href="hb-install-hppa-medium.xml"/>
603 </chapter>
604
605 <chapter>
606 <title>Configuring your Network</title>
607 <abstract>
608 If you need networking, this is the place where the network (and Internet
609 connection) is configured.
610 </abstract>
611 <include href="hb-install-network.xml"/>
612 </chapter>
613
614 <chapter>
615 <title>Preparing the Disks</title>
616 <abstract>
617 To be able to install Gentoo, you must create the necessary partitions.
618 This chapter describes how to partition a disk for future usage.
619 </abstract>
620 <include href="hb-install-hppa-disk.xml"/>
621 </chapter>
622
623 <chapter>
624 <title>Installing the Gentoo Installation Files</title>
625 <abstract>
626 Gentoo installs work through so-called stage-files. In this chapter we
627 describe how you extract a stage-file and configure Portage.
628 </abstract>
629 <include href="hb-install-stage.xml"/>
630 </chapter>
631
632 <chapter>
633 <title>Chrooting into the Gentoo Base System</title>
634 <abstract>
635 Now that the stage3 file is extracted, we chroot into the new system and modify
636 the USE variable.
637 </abstract>
638 <include href="hb-install-system.xml"/>
639 </chapter>
640
641 <chapter>
642 <title>Configuring the Kernel</title>
643 <abstract>
644 The Linux kernel is the core of every distribution. This chapter
645 explains how to configure your kernel.
646 </abstract>
647 <include href="hb-install-hppa-kernel.xml"/>
648 </chapter>
649
650 <chapter>
651 <title>Configuring your System</title>
652 <abstract>
653 You need to edit some important configuration files. In this chapter
654 you receive an overview of these files and an explanation on how to
655 proceed.
656 </abstract>
657 <include href="hb-install-config.xml"/>
658
659
660
661 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-ppc.xml
662
663 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-ppc.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
664 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-ppc.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
665
666 Index: handbook-ppc.xml
667 ===================================================================
668 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
669 <!DOCTYPE book SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
670
671 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-ppc.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
672
673 <book link="handbook-ppc.xml">
674 <title>Gentoo Linux 2005.0 PPC Handbook</title>
675
676 <author title="Author">
677 <mail link="swift@g.o">Sven Vermeulen</mail>
678 </author>
679 <author title="Author">
680 <mail link="uberlord@g.o">Roy Marples</mail>
681 </author>
682 <author title="Author">
683 <mail link="drobbins@g.o">Daniel Robbins</mail>
684 </author>
685 <author title="Author">
686 <mail link="chouser@g.o">Chris Houser</mail>
687 </author>
688 <author title="Author">
689 <mail link="jerry@g.o">Jerry Alexandratos</mail>
690 </author>
691 <author title="Gentoo x86 Developer">
692 <mail link="seemant@g.o">Seemant Kulleen</mail>
693 </author>
694 <author title="Gentoo Alpha Developer">
695 <mail link="taviso@g.o">Tavis Ormandy</mail>
696 </author><!-- Does not want to be listed on the rendered page
697 <author title="Gentoo Developer">
698 Aron Griffis
699 </author>
700 -->
701 <author title="Gentoo AMD64 Developer">
702 <mail link="jhuebel@g.o">Jason Huebel</mail>
703 </author>
704 <author title="Gentoo HPPA developer">
705 <mail link="gmsoft@g.o">Guy Martin</mail>
706 </author>
707 <author title="Gentoo PPC developer">
708 <mail link="pvdabeel@g.o">Pieter Van den Abeele</mail>
709 </author>
710 <author title="Gentoo SPARC developer">
711 <mail link="blademan@g.o">Joe Kallar</mail>
712 </author>
713 <author title="Editor">
714 <mail link="zhen@g.o">John P. Davis</mail>
715 </author>
716 <author title="Editor">Pierre-Henri Jondot</author>
717 <author title="Editor">
718 <mail link="stocke2@g.o">Eric Stockbridge</mail>
719 </author>
720 <author title="Editor">
721 <mail link="rajiv@g.o">Rajiv Manglani</mail>
722 </author>
723 <author title="Editor">
724 <mail link="seo@g.o">Jungmin Seo</mail>
725 </author>
726 <author title="Editor">
727 <mail link="zhware@g.o">Stoyan Zhekov</mail>
728 </author>
729 <author title="Editor">
730 <mail link="jhhudso@g.o">Jared Hudson</mail>
731 </author>
732 <author title="Editor">
733 <mail link="peitolm@g.o">Colin Morey</mail>
734 </author>
735 <author title="Editor">
736 <mail link="peesh@g.o">Jorge Paulo</mail>
737 </author>
738 <author title="Editor">
739 <mail link="carl@g.o">Carl Anderson</mail>
740 </author>
741 <author title="Editor">
742 <mail link="avenj@g.o">Jon Portnoy</mail>
743 </author>
744 <author title="Editor">
745 <mail link="klasikahl@g.o">Zack Gilburd</mail>
746 </author>
747 <author title="Editor">
748 <mail link="jmorgan@g.o">Jack Morgan</mail>
749 </author>
750 <author title="Editor">
751 <mail link="bennyc@g.o">Benny Chuang</mail>
752 </author>
753 <author title="Editor">
754 <mail link="erwin@g.o">Erwin</mail>
755 </author>
756 <author title="Editor">
757 <mail link="kumba@g.o">Joshua Kinard</mail>
758 </author>
759 <author title="Editor">
760 <mail link="dertobi123@g.o">Tobias Scherbaum</mail>
761 </author>
762 <author title="Editor">
763 <mail link="pylon@g.o">Lars Weiler</mail>
764 </author>
765 <author title="Editor">
766 <mail link="sejo@g.o">Jochen Maes </mail>
767 </author>
768 <author title="Reviewer">
769 <mail link="g2boojum@g.o">Grant Goodyear</mail>
770 </author>
771 <author title="Reviewer">
772 <mail link="gerrynjr@g.o">Gerald J. Normandin Jr.</mail>
773 </author>
774 <author title="Reviewer">
775 <mail link="spyderous@g.o">Donnie Berkholz</mail>
776 </author>
777 <author title="Reviewer">
778 <mail link="antifa@g.o">Ken Nowack</mail>
779 </author>
780
781 <abstract>
782 This is the Gentoo Handbook, an effort to centralise Gentoo/Linux
783 information.
784 </abstract>
785
786 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
787 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0 -->
788 <license/>
789
790 <version>4.1</version>
791 <date>2005-06-09</date>
792
793 <part>
794 <title>Installing Gentoo</title>
795 <abstract>
796 In this part you learn how to install Gentoo on your system.
797 </abstract>
798
799 <chapter>
800 <title>About the Gentoo Linux Installation</title>
801 <abstract>
802 Users not familiar with Gentoo do not always know that choice is what
803 Gentoo is all about.
804 </abstract>
805 <include href="hb-install-about.xml"/>
806 </chapter>
807
808 <chapter>
809 <title>Booting the Universal Installation CD</title>
810 <abstract>
811 Using our Universal Installation CD you can boot up your system into a running
812 environment that allows you to install Gentoo.
813 </abstract>
814 <include href="hb-install-ppc-medium.xml"/>
815 </chapter>
816
817 <chapter>
818 <title>Configuring your Network</title>
819 <abstract>
820 If you need networking, this is the place where the network (and Internet
821 connection) is configured.
822 </abstract>
823 <include href="hb-install-network.xml"/>
824 </chapter>
825
826 <chapter>
827 <title>Preparing the Disks</title>
828 <abstract>
829 To be able to install Gentoo, you must create the necessary partitions.
830 This chapter describes how to partition a disk for future usage.
831 </abstract>
832 <include href="hb-install-ppc-disk.xml"/>
833 </chapter>
834
835 <chapter>
836 <title>Installing the Gentoo Installation Files</title>
837 <abstract>
838 In this chapter we describe how you extract a stage3 file and how to configure
839 Portage.
840 </abstract>
841 <include href="hb-install-stage.xml"/>
842 </chapter>
843
844 <chapter>
845 <title>Chrooting into the Gentoo Base System</title>
846 <abstract>
847 Now that the stage3 file is extracted, we chroot into the new system and modify
848 the USE variable.
849 </abstract>
850 <include href="hb-install-system.xml"/>
851 </chapter>
852
853 <chapter>
854 <title>Configuring the Kernel</title>
855 <abstract>
856 The Linux kernel is the core of every distribution. This chapter
857 explains how to configure your kernel.
858 </abstract>
859 <include href="hb-install-ppc-kernel.xml"/>
860 </chapter>
861
862 <chapter>
863 <title>Configuring your System</title>
864 <abstract>
865 You need to edit some important configuration files. In this chapter
866 you receive an overview of these files and an explanation on how to
867
868
869
870 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-sparc.xml
871
872 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-sparc.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
873 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-sparc.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
874
875 Index: handbook-sparc.xml
876 ===================================================================
877 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
878 <!DOCTYPE book SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
879
880 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-sparc.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
881
882 <book link="handbook-sparc.xml">
883 <title>Gentoo Linux 2005.0 SPARC Handbook</title>
884
885 <author title="Author">
886 <mail link="swift@g.o">Sven Vermeulen</mail>
887 </author>
888 <author title="Author">
889 <mail link="uberlord@g.o">Roy Marples</mail>
890 </author>
891 <author title="Author">
892 <mail link="drobbins@g.o">Daniel Robbins</mail>
893 </author>
894 <author title="Author">
895 <mail link="chouser@g.o">Chris Houser</mail>
896 </author>
897 <author title="Author">
898 <mail link="jerry@g.o">Jerry Alexandratos</mail>
899 </author>
900 <author title="Gentoo x86 Developer">
901 <mail link="seemant@g.o">Seemant Kulleen</mail>
902 </author>
903 <author title="Gentoo Alpha Developer">
904 <mail link="taviso@g.o">Tavis Ormandy</mail>
905 </author><!-- Does not want to be listed on the rendered page
906 <author title="Gentoo Developer">
907 Aron Griffis
908 </author>
909 -->
910 <author title="Gentoo AMD64 Developer">
911 <mail link="jhuebel@g.o">Jason Huebel</mail>
912 </author>
913 <author title="Gentoo HPPA developer">
914 <mail link="gmsoft@g.o">Guy Martin</mail>
915 </author>
916 <author title="Gentoo PPC developer">
917 <mail link="pvdabeel@g.o">Pieter Van den Abeele</mail>
918 </author>
919 <author title="Gentoo SPARC developer">
920 <mail link="blademan@g.o">Joe Kallar</mail>
921 </author>
922 <author title="Editor">
923 <mail link="zhen@g.o">John P. Davis</mail>
924 </author>
925 <author title="Editor">Pierre-Henri Jondot</author>
926 <author title="Editor">
927 <mail link="stocke2@g.o">Eric Stockbridge</mail>
928 </author>
929 <author title="Editor">
930 <mail link="rajiv@g.o">Rajiv Manglani</mail>
931 </author>
932 <author title="Editor">
933 <mail link="seo@g.o">Jungmin Seo</mail>
934 </author>
935 <author title="Editor">
936 <mail link="zhware@g.o">Stoyan Zhekov</mail>
937 </author>
938 <author title="Editor">
939 <mail link="jhhudso@g.o">Jared Hudson</mail>
940 </author>
941 <author title="Editor">
942 <mail link="peitolm@g.o">Colin Morey</mail>
943 </author>
944 <author title="Editor">
945 <mail link="peesh@g.o">Jorge Paulo</mail>
946 </author>
947 <author title="Editor">
948 <mail link="carl@g.o">Carl Anderson</mail>
949 </author>
950 <author title="Editor">
951 <mail link="avenj@g.o">Jon Portnoy</mail>
952 </author>
953 <author title="Editor">
954 <mail link="klasikahl@g.o">Zack Gilburd</mail>
955 </author>
956 <author title="Editor">
957 <mail link="jmorgan@g.o">Jack Morgan</mail>
958 </author>
959 <author title="Editor">
960 <mail link="bennyc@g.o">Benny Chuang</mail>
961 </author>
962 <author title="Editor">
963 <mail link="erwin@g.o">Erwin</mail>
964 </author>
965 <author title="Editor">
966 <mail link="kumba@g.o">Joshua Kinard</mail>
967 </author>
968 <author title="Editor">
969 <mail link="dertobi123@g.o">Tobias Scherbaum</mail>
970 </author>
971 <author title="Reviewer">
972 <mail link="g2boojum@g.o">Grant Goodyear</mail>
973 </author>
974 <author title="Reviewer">
975 <mail link="gerrynjr@g.o">Gerald J. Normandin Jr.</mail>
976 </author>
977 <author title="Reviewer">
978 <mail link="spyderous@g.o">Donnie Berkholz</mail>
979 </author>
980 <author title="Reviewer">
981 <mail link="antifa@g.o">Ken Nowack</mail>
982 </author>
983 <author title="Contributor">
984 <mail link="pylon@g.o">Lars Weiler</mail>
985 </author>
986
987 <abstract>
988 This is the Gentoo Handbook, an effort to centralise Gentoo/Linux
989 information.
990 </abstract>
991
992 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
993 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0 -->
994 <license/>
995
996 <version>4.1</version>
997 <date>2005-06-09</date>
998
999 <part>
1000 <title>Installing Gentoo</title>
1001 <abstract>
1002 In this part you learn how to install Gentoo on your system.
1003 </abstract>
1004
1005 <chapter>
1006 <title>About the Gentoo Linux Installation</title>
1007 <abstract>
1008 Users not familiar with Gentoo do not always know that choice is what
1009 Gentoo is all about.
1010 </abstract>
1011 <include href="hb-install-about.xml"/>
1012 </chapter>
1013
1014 <chapter>
1015 <title>Booting the Universal Installation CD</title>
1016 <abstract>
1017 Using our Universal Installation CD you can boot up your system into a running
1018 environment that allows you to install Gentoo.
1019 </abstract>
1020 <include href="hb-install-sparc-medium.xml"/>
1021 </chapter>
1022
1023 <chapter>
1024 <title>Configuring your Network</title>
1025 <abstract>
1026 If you need networking, this is the place where the network (and Internet
1027 connection) is configured.
1028 </abstract>
1029 <include href="hb-install-network.xml"/>
1030 </chapter>
1031
1032 <chapter>
1033 <title>Preparing the Disks</title>
1034 <abstract>
1035 To be able to install Gentoo, you must create the necessary partitions.
1036 This chapter describes how to partition a disk for future usage.
1037 </abstract>
1038 <include href="hb-install-sparc-disk.xml"/>
1039 </chapter>
1040
1041 <chapter>
1042 <title>Installing the Gentoo Installation Files</title>
1043 <abstract>
1044 In this chapter we describe how you extract a stage3 file and how to configure
1045 Portage.
1046 </abstract>
1047 <include href="hb-install-stage.xml"/>
1048 </chapter>
1049
1050 <chapter>
1051 <title>Chrooting into the Gentoo Base System</title>
1052 <abstract>
1053 Now that the stage3 file is extracted, we chroot into the new system and modify
1054 the USE variable.
1055 </abstract>
1056 <include href="hb-install-system.xml"/>
1057 </chapter>
1058
1059 <chapter>
1060 <title>Configuring the Kernel</title>
1061 <abstract>
1062 The Linux kernel is the core of every distribution. This chapter
1063 explains how to configure your kernel.
1064 </abstract>
1065 <include href="hb-install-sparc-kernel.xml"/>
1066 </chapter>
1067
1068 <chapter>
1069 <title>Configuring your System</title>
1070 <abstract>
1071 You need to edit some important configuration files. In this chapter
1072 you receive an overview of these files and an explanation on how to
1073 proceed.
1074 </abstract>
1075 <include href="hb-install-config.xml"/>
1076
1077
1078
1079 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-x86.xml
1080
1081 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-x86.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
1082 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-x86.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
1083
1084 Index: handbook-x86.xml
1085 ===================================================================
1086 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
1087 <!DOCTYPE book SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
1088
1089 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/handbook-x86.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
1090
1091 <book link="handbook-x86.xml">
1092 <title>Gentoo Linux 2005.0 x86 Handbook</title>
1093
1094 <author title="Author">
1095 <mail link="swift@g.o">Sven Vermeulen</mail>
1096 </author>
1097 <author title="Author">
1098 <mail link="uberlord@g.o">Roy Marples</mail>
1099 </author>
1100 <author title="Author">
1101 <mail link="drobbins@g.o">Daniel Robbins</mail>
1102 </author>
1103 <author title="Author">
1104 <mail link="chouser@g.o">Chris Houser</mail>
1105 </author>
1106 <author title="Author">
1107 <mail link="jerry@g.o">Jerry Alexandratos</mail>
1108 </author>
1109 <author title="Gentoo x86 Developer">
1110 <mail link="seemant@g.o">Seemant Kulleen</mail>
1111 </author>
1112 <author title="Gentoo Alpha Developer">
1113 <mail link="taviso@g.o">Tavis Ormandy</mail>
1114 </author><!-- Does not want to be listed on the rendered page
1115 <author title="Gentoo Developer">
1116 Aron Griffis
1117 </author>
1118 -->
1119 <author title="Gentoo AMD64 Developer">
1120 <mail link="jhuebel@g.o">Jason Huebel</mail>
1121 </author>
1122 <author title="Gentoo HPPA developer">
1123 <mail link="gmsoft@g.o">Guy Martin</mail>
1124 </author>
1125 <author title="Gentoo PPC developer">
1126 <mail link="pvdabeel@g.o">Pieter Van den Abeele</mail>
1127 </author>
1128 <author title="Gentoo SPARC developer">
1129 <mail link="blademan@g.o">Joe Kallar</mail>
1130 </author>
1131 <author title="Editor">
1132 <mail link="zhen@g.o">John P. Davis</mail>
1133 </author>
1134 <author title="Editor">Pierre-Henri Jondot</author>
1135 <author title="Editor">
1136 <mail link="stocke2@g.o">Eric Stockbridge</mail>
1137 </author>
1138 <author title="Editor">
1139 <mail link="rajiv@g.o">Rajiv Manglani</mail>
1140 </author>
1141 <author title="Editor">
1142 <mail link="seo@g.o">Jungmin Seo</mail>
1143 </author>
1144 <author title="Editor">
1145 <mail link="zhware@g.o">Stoyan Zhekov</mail>
1146 </author>
1147 <author title="Editor">
1148 <mail link="jhhudso@g.o">Jared Hudson</mail>
1149 </author>
1150 <author title="Editor">
1151 <mail link="peitolm@g.o">Colin Morey</mail>
1152 </author>
1153 <author title="Editor">
1154 <mail link="peesh@g.o">Jorge Paulo</mail>
1155 </author>
1156 <author title="Editor">
1157 <mail link="carl@g.o">Carl Anderson</mail>
1158 </author>
1159 <author title="Editor">
1160 <mail link="avenj@g.o">Jon Portnoy</mail>
1161 </author>
1162 <author title="Editor">
1163 <mail link="klasikahl@g.o">Zack Gilburd</mail>
1164 </author>
1165 <author title="Editor">
1166 <mail link="jmorgan@g.o">Jack Morgan</mail>
1167 </author>
1168 <author title="Editor">
1169 <mail link="bennyc@g.o">Benny Chuang</mail>
1170 </author>
1171 <author title="Editor">
1172 <mail link="erwin@g.o">Erwin</mail>
1173 </author>
1174 <author title="Editor">
1175 <mail link="kumba@g.o">Joshua Kinard</mail>
1176 </author>
1177 <author title="Editor">
1178 <mail link="dertobi123@g.o">Tobias Scherbaum</mail>
1179 </author>
1180 <author title="Reviewer">
1181 <mail link="g2boojum@g.o">Grant Goodyear</mail>
1182 </author>
1183 <author title="Reviewer">
1184 <mail link="gerrynjr@g.o">Gerald J. Normandin Jr.</mail>
1185 </author>
1186 <author title="Reviewer">
1187 <mail link="spyderous@g.o">Donnie Berkholz</mail>
1188 </author>
1189 <author title="Reviewer">
1190 <mail link="antifa@g.o">Ken Nowack</mail>
1191 </author>
1192 <author title="Contributor">
1193 <mail link="pylon@g.o">Lars Weiler</mail>
1194 </author>
1195
1196 <abstract>
1197 This is the Gentoo Handbook, an effort to centralise Gentoo/Linux
1198 information.
1199 </abstract>
1200
1201 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
1202 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0 -->
1203 <license/>
1204
1205 <version>4.1</version>
1206 <date>2005-06-09</date>
1207
1208 <part>
1209 <title>Installing Gentoo</title>
1210 <abstract>
1211 In this part you learn how to install Gentoo on your system.
1212 </abstract>
1213
1214 <chapter>
1215 <title>About the Gentoo Linux Installation</title>
1216 <abstract>
1217 Users not familiar with Gentoo do not always know that choice is what
1218 Gentoo is all about.
1219 </abstract>
1220 <include href="hb-install-about.xml"/>
1221 </chapter>
1222
1223 <chapter>
1224 <title>Booting the Universal Installation CD</title>
1225 <abstract>
1226 Using our Universal Installation CD you can boot up your system into a running
1227 environment that allows you to install Gentoo.
1228 </abstract>
1229 <include href="hb-install-x86-medium.xml"/>
1230 </chapter>
1231
1232 <chapter>
1233 <title>Configuring your Network</title>
1234 <abstract>
1235 If you need networking, this is the place where the network (and Internet
1236 connection) is configured.
1237 </abstract>
1238 <include href="hb-install-network.xml"/>
1239 </chapter>
1240
1241 <chapter>
1242 <title>Preparing the Disks</title>
1243 <abstract>
1244 To be able to install Gentoo, you must create the necessary partitions.
1245 This chapter describes how to partition a disk for future usage.
1246 </abstract>
1247 <include href="hb-install-x86-disk.xml"/>
1248 </chapter>
1249
1250 <chapter>
1251 <title>Installing the Gentoo Installation Files</title>
1252 <abstract>
1253 In this chapter we describe how you extract a stage3 file and
1254 how to configure Portage.
1255 </abstract>
1256 <include href="hb-install-stage.xml"/>
1257 </chapter>
1258
1259 <chapter>
1260 <title>Chrooting into the Gentoo Base System</title>
1261 <abstract>
1262 Now that the stage3 file is extracted, we chroot into the new system and
1263 modify the USE variable.
1264 </abstract>
1265 <include href="hb-install-system.xml"/>
1266 </chapter>
1267
1268 <chapter>
1269 <title>Configuring the Kernel</title>
1270 <abstract>
1271 The Linux kernel is the core of every distribution. This chapter
1272 explains how to configure your kernel.
1273 </abstract>
1274 <include href="hb-install-x86-kernel.xml"/>
1275 </chapter>
1276
1277 <chapter>
1278 <title>Configuring your System</title>
1279 <abstract>
1280 You need to edit some important configuration files. In this chapter
1281 you receive an overview of these files and an explanation on how to
1282 proceed.
1283 </abstract>
1284 <include href="hb-install-config.xml"/>
1285
1286
1287
1288 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-about.xml
1289
1290 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-about.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
1291 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-about.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
1292
1293 Index: hb-install-about.xml
1294 ===================================================================
1295 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
1296 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
1297
1298 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
1299 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.0 -->
1300
1301 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-about.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
1302
1303 <sections>
1304
1305 <version>4.1</version>
1306 <date>2005-03-28</date>
1307
1308 <section>
1309 <title>Introduction</title>
1310 <subsection>
1311 <title>Welcome!</title>
1312 <body>
1313
1314 <p>
1315 First of all, <e>welcome</e> to Gentoo. You are about to enter the world
1316 of choices and performance. Gentoo is all about choices. When
1317 installing Gentoo, this is made clear to you several times -- you can
1318 choose how much you want to compile yourself, how to install Gentoo,
1319 what system logger you want, etc.
1320 </p>
1321
1322 <p>
1323 Gentoo is a fast, modern metadistribution with a clean and flexible
1324 design. Gentoo is built around free software and doesn't hide from its
1325 users what is beneath the hood. Portage, the package maintenance system
1326 which Gentoo uses, is written in Python, meaning you can easily view and
1327 modify the source code. Gentoo's packaging system uses source code
1328 (although support for precompiled packages is included too) and
1329 configuring Gentoo happens through regular textfiles. In other words,
1330 openness everywhere.
1331 </p>
1332
1333 <p>
1334 It is very important that you understand that <e>choices</e> are what
1335 makes Gentoo run. We try not to force you onto anything you don't like.
1336 If you feel like we do, please <uri
1337 link="http://bugs.gentoo.org">bugreport</uri> it.
1338 </p>
1339
1340 </body>
1341 </subsection>
1342 <subsection>
1343 <title>How is the Installation Structured?</title>
1344 <body>
1345
1346 <p>
1347 The Gentoo Installation can be seen as a 10-step procedure,
1348 corresponding to chapters 2 - 11. Every step results in
1349 a certain state:
1350 </p>
1351
1352 <ul>
1353 <li>
1354 After step 1, you are in a working environment ready to install Gentoo
1355 </li>
1356 <li>
1357 After step 2, your internet connection is prepared in case you need it (this
1358 is however optional)
1359 </li>
1360 <li>
1361 After step 3, your hard disks are initialized to house your Gentoo
1362 installation
1363 </li>
1364 <li>
1365 After step 4, your installation environment is prepared and you are
1366 ready to chroot into the new environment
1367 </li>
1368 <li>
1369 After step 5, core packages, which are the same on all Gentoo
1370 installations, are installed
1371 </li>
1372 <li>
1373 After step 6, you have compiled your Linux kernel
1374 </li>
1375 <li>
1376 After step 7, you have written most of your Gentoo system
1377 configuration files
1378 </li>
1379 <li>
1380 After step 8, necessary system tools (which you can choose from a nice
1381 list) are installed
1382 </li>
1383 <li>
1384 After step 9, your choice of bootloader has been installed and
1385 configured and you are logged in into your new Gentoo installation
1386 </li>
1387 <li>
1388 After step 10, your Gentoo Linux environment is ready to be explored
1389 </li>
1390 </ul>
1391
1392 <p>
1393 When you are given a certain choice, we try our best to explain what the pros
1394 and cons are. We will continue then with a default
1395 choice, identified by &quot;Default: &quot; in the title. The other
1396 possibilities are marked by &quot;Alternative: &quot;. Do <e>not</e>
1397 think that the default is what we recommend. It is however what we
1398 believe most users will use.
1399 </p>
1400
1401 <p>
1402 Sometimes you can pursue an optional step. Such steps are marked as
1403 &quot;Optional: &quot; and are therefore not needed to install Gentoo.
1404 However, some optional steps are dependant on a previous decision you
1405 made. We will inform you when this happens, both when you make the
1406 decision, and right before the optional step is described.
1407 </p>
1408
1409 </body>
1410 </subsection>
1411 <subsection>
1412 <title>What are my Options?</title>
1413 <body>
1414
1415 <p>
1416 You can install Gentoo in many different ways. You can download and install from
1417 one of our Installation CDs, from an existing distribution,
1418 from a bootable CD (such as Knoppix), from a netbooted environment, from a
1419 rescue floppy, etc.
1420 </p>
1421
1422 <p>
1423 This document covers the installation using the Universal Installation CD, a
1424 bootable CD that contains everything you need to get Gentoo Linux up and
1425 running. You can optionally use one of our Package CDs as well to install a
1426 complete system in a matter of minutes after having installed the Gentoo base
1427 system.
1428 </p>
1429
1430 <p>
1431 This installation approach however does not immediately use the latest version
1432 of the available packages; if you want this you should check out the
1433 Installation Instructions inside our <uri
1434 link="/doc/en/handbook/index.xml">Gentoo Linux Handbooks</uri>.
1435 </p>
1436
1437 <p>
1438 For help on the other installation approaches,
1439 please read our <uri link="/doc/en/altinstall.xml">Alternative Installation
1440 Guide</uri>. We also provide a <uri
1441 link="/doc/en/gentoo-x86-tipsntricks.xml">Gentoo Installation Tips &amp;
1442 Tricks</uri> document that might be useful to read as well. If you feel that
1443 the current installation instructions are too elaborate, feel free to use our
1444 Quick Installation Guide available from our <uri
1445 link="/doc/en/index.xml">Documentation Resources</uri> if your architecture
1446 has such a document available.
1447 </p>
1448
1449 </body>
1450 </subsection>
1451 <subsection>
1452 <title>Troubles?</title>
1453 <body>
1454
1455 <p>
1456 If you find a problem in the installation (or in the installation
1457 documentation), please check the errata from our <uri
1458 link="/proj/en/releng/">Gentoo Release Engineering Project</uri>,
1459 visit our <uri link="http://bugs.gentoo.org">bugtracking
1460 system</uri> and check if the bug is known. If not, please create a bugreport
1461 for it so we can take care of it. Do not be afraid of the developers who are
1462 assigned to (your) bugs -- they generally don't eat people.
1463 </p>
1464
1465 <p>
1466 Note though that, although the document you are now reading is
1467 architecture-specific, it will contain references to other architectures as
1468 well. This is due to the fact that large parts of the Gentoo Handbook use source
1469 code that is common for all architectures (to avoid duplication of efforts and
1470 starvation of development resources). We will try to keep this to a minimum
1471 to avoid confusion.
1472 </p>
1473
1474 <p>
1475 If you are uncertain if the problem is a user-problem (some error you
1476 made despite having read the documentation carefully) or a
1477 software-problem (some error we made despite having tested the
1478 installation/documentation carefully) you are free to join #gentoo on
1479 irc.freenode.net. Of course, you are welcome otherwise too :)
1480 </p>
1481
1482 <p>
1483 If you have a question regarding Gentoo, check out our <uri
1484 link="/doc/en/faq.xml">Frequently Asked
1485 Questions</uri>, available from the <uri
1486 link="/doc/en/">Gentoo Documentation</uri>. You can
1487 also view the <uri
1488 link="http://forums.gentoo.org/viewforum.php?f=40">FAQs</uri> on our
1489 <uri link="http://forums.gentoo.org">forums</uri>. If you can't find the answer
1490 there ask on #gentoo, our IRC-channel on irc.freenode.net. Yes, several of
1491 us are freaks who sit on IRC :-)
1492 </p>
1493
1494
1495
1496
1497 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-bootloader.xml
1498
1499 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
1500 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
1501
1502 Index: hb-install-alpha-bootloader.xml
1503 ===================================================================
1504 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
1505 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
1506
1507 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
1508 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
1509
1510 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-bootloader.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
1511
1512 <sections>
1513
1514 <version>4.1</version>
1515 <date>2005-03-29</date>
1516
1517 <section>
1518 <title>Making your Choice</title>
1519 <subsection>
1520 <title>Introduction</title>
1521 <body>
1522
1523 <p>
1524 Now that your kernel is configured and compiled and the necessary system
1525 configuration files are filled in correctly, it is time to install a
1526 program that will fire up your kernel when you start the system. Such a
1527 program is called a <e>bootloader</e>.
1528 </p>
1529
1530 <p>
1531 Several bootloaders exist for Linux/Alpha. You must choose one of the supported
1532 bootloaders, not all. You have the choice between <uri link="#aboot">aBoot</uri>
1533 and <uri link="#milo">MILO</uri>.
1534 </p>
1535
1536 </body>
1537 </subsection>
1538 </section>
1539 <section id="aboot">
1540 <title>Default: Using aboot</title>
1541 <body>
1542
1543 <p>
1544 We first install aboot on our system. Of course we use <c>emerge</c> to
1545 do so:
1546 </p>
1547
1548 <pre caption = "Installing aboot">
1549 # <i>emerge --usepkg aboot</i>
1550 </pre>
1551
1552 <p>
1553 The next step is to make our bootdisk bootable. This will start
1554 <c>aboot</c> when you boot your system. We make our bootdisk bootable by
1555 writing the <c>aboot</c> bootloader to the start of the disk.
1556 </p>
1557
1558 <pre caption = "Making your bootdisk bootable">
1559 # <i>swriteboot -f3 /dev/sda /boot/bootlx</i>
1560 # <i>abootconf /dev/sda 2</i>
1561 </pre>
1562
1563 <note>
1564 If you use a different partitioning scheme than the one we use
1565 throughout this chapter, you have to change the commands accordingly.
1566 Please read the appropriate manual pages (<c>man 8 swriteboot</c> and
1567 <c>man 8 abootconf</c>). Also, if your root filesystem uses the JFS filesystem,
1568 make sure to pass the <c>ro</c> kernel option so that it can replay its log
1569 before it gets mounted read-write.
1570 </note>
1571
1572 <p>
1573 Additionally, you can make Gentoo boot automatically by setting up the
1574 aboot configuration file and some SRM variables. You can try setting
1575 these variables from Linux, but it may be easier to do so from the SRM
1576 console itself.
1577 </p>
1578
1579 <pre caption = "Automatically booting Gentoo">
1580 # <i>echo '0:2/boot/vmlinux.gz root=/dev/sda2' &gt; /etc/aboot.conf</i>
1581 # <i>cd /proc/srm_environment/named_variables</i>
1582 # <i>echo -n 0 &gt; boot_osflags</i>
1583 # <i>echo -n '' &gt; boot_file</i>
1584 # <i>echo -n 'BOOT' &gt; auto_action</i>
1585 # <i>echo -n 'dkc100' &gt; bootdef_dev</i>
1586 <comment>(Substitute dkc100 with whatever your boot device is)</comment>
1587 </pre>
1588
1589 <p>
1590 If you need to get into the SRM console again in the future (to recover
1591 your Gentoo install, play with some variables, or whatever), just hit
1592 CTRL+C to abort the automatic loading process.
1593 </p>
1594
1595 <p>
1596 If you're installing using a serial console, don't forget to include
1597 the serial console boot flag in <path>aboot.conf</path>. See
1598 <path>/etc/aboot.conf.example</path> for some further information.
1599 </p>
1600
1601 <p>
1602 Aboot is now configured and ready to use. Continue with <uri
1603 link="#reboot">Rebooting the System</uri>.
1604 </p>
1605
1606 </body>
1607 </section>
1608 <section id="milo">
1609 <title>Alternative: Using MILO</title>
1610 <body>
1611
1612 <p>
1613 Before continuing, you should decide on how to use MILO. In this
1614 section, we will assume that you want to make a MILO boot floppy. If you
1615 are going to boot from an MS-DOS partition on your hard disk, you should
1616 amend the commands appropriately.
1617 </p>
1618
1619 <p>
1620 To install MILO, we use <c>emerge</c>.
1621 </p>
1622
1623 <pre caption = "Installing MILO">
1624 # <i>emerge --usepkg milo</i>
1625 </pre>
1626
1627 <p>
1628 After MILO has been installed, the MILO images should be in
1629 <path>/opt/milo</path>. The commands below make a bootfloppy for use
1630 with MILO. Remember to use the correct image for your Alpha-system.
1631 </p>
1632
1633 <pre caption = "Installing MILO on a floppy">
1634 <comment>(First insert a blank floppy)</comment>
1635 # <i>fdformat /dev/fd0</i>
1636 # <i>mformat a:</i>
1637 # <i>mcopy /opt/milo/milo-2.2-18-gentoo-ruffian a:\milo</i>
1638 # <i>mcopy /opt/milo/linload.exe a:\lilnload.exe</i>
1639 <comment>(Only if you have a Ruffian:</comment>
1640 # <i>mcopy /opt/milo/ldmilo.exe a:\ldmilo.exe</i>
1641 <comment>)</comment>
1642 # <i>echo -ne '\125\252' | dd of=/dev/fd0 bs=1 seek=510 count=2</i>
1643 </pre>
1644
1645 <p>
1646 Your MILO boot floppy is now ready to boot Gentoo Linux. You may need to
1647 set environment variables in your ARCS Firmware to get MILO to start;
1648 this is all explained in the <uri
1649 link="http://tldp.org/HOWTO/MILO-HOWTO/">MILO-HOWTO</uri> with some examples
1650 on common systems, and examples of the commands to use in interactive mode.
1651 </p>
1652
1653 <p>
1654 Not reading the <uri link="http://tldp.org/HOWTO/MILO-HOWTO/">MILO-HOWTO</uri>
1655 is a <e>bad</e> idea.
1656 </p>
1657
1658 <p>
1659 Now continue with <uri link="#reboot">Rebooting the System</uri>.
1660 </p>
1661
1662 </body>
1663 </section>
1664 <section id="reboot">
1665 <title>Rebooting the System</title>
1666 <subsection>
1667 <body>
1668
1669 <p>
1670 Exit the chrooted environment and unmount all mounted partitions. Then type in
1671 that one magical command you have been waiting for: <c>reboot</c>.
1672 </p>
1673
1674 <pre caption="Exiting the chroot, unmounting all partitions and rebooting">
1675 # <i>exit</i>
1676 cdimage ~# <i>cd</i>
1677 cdimage ~# <i>umount /mnt/gentoo/boot /mnt/gentoo/proc /mnt/gentoo</i>
1678 cdimage ~# <i>reboot</i>
1679 </pre>
1680
1681 <p>
1682 Of course, don't forget to remove the bootable CD, otherwise the CD will be
1683 booted again instead of your new Gentoo system.
1684 </p>
1685
1686 <p>
1687 Once rebooted in your Gentoo installation, finish up with <uri
1688 link="?part=1&amp;chap=11">Finalizing your Gentoo Installation</uri>.
1689 </p>
1690
1691 </body>
1692 </subsection>
1693 </section>
1694
1695 </sections>
1696
1697
1698
1699 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-disk.xml
1700
1701 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
1702 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
1703
1704 Index: hb-install-alpha-disk.xml
1705 ===================================================================
1706 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
1707 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
1708
1709 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
1710 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.5 -->
1711
1712 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-disk.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
1713
1714 <sections>
1715
1716 <version>4.2</version>
1717 <date>2005-08-02</date>
1718
1719 <section>
1720 <title>Introduction to Block Devices</title>
1721 <subsection>
1722 <title>Block Devices</title>
1723 <body>
1724
1725 <p>
1726 We'll take a good look at disk-oriented aspects of Gentoo Linux
1727 and Linux in general, including Linux filesystems, partitions and block devices.
1728 Then, once you're familiar with the ins and outs of disks and filesystems,
1729 you'll be guided through the process of setting up partitions and filesystems
1730 for your Gentoo Linux installation.
1731 </p>
1732
1733 <p>
1734 To begin, we'll introduce <e>block devices</e>. The most famous block device is
1735 probably the one that represents the first SCSI HD in a Linux system, namely
1736 <path>/dev/sda</path>.
1737 </p>
1738
1739 <p>
1740 The block devices above represent an abstract interface to the disk. User
1741 programs can use these block devices to interact with your disk without worrying
1742 about whether your drives are IDE, SCSI or something else. The program can
1743 simply address the storage on the disk as a bunch of contiguous,
1744 randomly-accessible 512-byte blocks.
1745 </p>
1746
1747 </body>
1748 </subsection>
1749 <subsection>
1750 <title>Slices</title>
1751 <body>
1752
1753 <p>
1754 Although it is theoretically possible to use a full disk to house your Linux
1755 system, this is almost never done in practice. Instead, full disk block devices
1756 are split up in smaller, more manageable block devices. On Alpha systems,
1757 these are called <e>slices</e>.
1758 </p>
1759
1760 </body>
1761 </subsection>
1762 </section>
1763 <section>
1764 <title>Designing a Partitioning Scheme</title>
1765 <subsection>
1766 <title>Default Partitioning Scheme</title>
1767 <body>
1768
1769 <p>
1770 As an example we use the following slice layout:
1771 </p>
1772
1773 <table>
1774 <tr>
1775 <th>Slice</th>
1776 <th>Description</th>
1777 </tr>
1778 <tr>
1779 <ti><path>/dev/sda1</path></ti>
1780 <ti>Swap slice</ti>
1781 </tr>
1782 <tr>
1783 <ti><path>/dev/sda2</path></ti>
1784 <ti>Root slice</ti>
1785 </tr>
1786 <tr>
1787 <ti><path>/dev/sda3</path></ti>
1788 <ti>Full disk (required)</ti>
1789 </tr>
1790 </table>
1791
1792
1793 <p>
1794 If you are interested in knowing how big a partition should be, or even how
1795 many partitions (or volumes) you need, read on. Otherwise continue now with
1796 <uri link="#fdisk_SRM">Using fdisk to Partition your Disk (SRM only)</uri>
1797 or <uri link="#fdisk_ARC">Using fdisk to Partition your Disk (ARC/AlphaBIOS
1798 only)</uri>.
1799 </p>
1800
1801 </body>
1802 </subsection>
1803 <subsection>
1804 <title>How Many and How Big?</title>
1805 <body>
1806
1807 <p>
1808 The number of partitions is highly dependent on your environment. For instance,
1809 if you have lots of users, you will most likely want to have your
1810 <path>/home</path> separate as it increases security and makes backups easier.
1811 If you are installing Gentoo to perform as a mailserver, your
1812 <path>/var</path> should be separate as all mails are stored inside
1813 <path>/var</path>. A good choice of filesystem will then maximise your
1814 performance. Gameservers will have a separate <path>/opt</path> as most gaming
1815 servers are installed there. The reason is similar for <path>/home</path>:
1816 security and backups. You will definitely want to keep <path>/usr</path> big:
1817 not only will it contain the majority of applications, the Portage tree alone
1818 takes around 500 Mbyte excluding the various sources that are stored in it.
1819 </p>
1820
1821 <p>
1822 As you can see, it very much depends on what you want to achieve. Separate
1823 partitions or volumes have the following advantages:
1824 </p>
1825
1826 <ul>
1827 <li>
1828 You can choose the best performing filesystem for each partition or volume
1829 </li>
1830 <li>
1831 Your entire system cannot run out of free space if one defunct tool is
1832 continuously writing files to a partition or volume
1833 </li>
1834 <li>
1835 If necessary, file system checks are reduced in time, as multiple checks can
1836 be done in parallel (although this advantage is more with multiple disks than
1837 it is with multiple partitions)
1838 </li>
1839 <li>
1840 Security can be enhanced by mounting some partitions or volumes read-only,
1841 nosuid (setuid bits are ignored), noexec (executable bits are ignored) etc.
1842 </li>
1843 </ul>
1844
1845 <p>
1846 However, multiple partitions have one big disadvantage: if not configured
1847 properly, you might result in having a system with lots
1848 of free space on one partition and none on another.
1849 </p>
1850
1851 </body>
1852 </subsection>
1853 </section>
1854 <section id="fdisk_SRM">
1855 <title>Using fdisk to Partition your Disk (SRM only)</title>
1856 <subsection>
1857 <body>
1858
1859 <p>
1860 The following parts explain how to create the example slice layout described
1861 previously, namely:
1862 </p>
1863
1864 <table>
1865 <tr>
1866 <th>Slice</th>
1867 <th>Description</th>
1868 </tr>
1869 <tr>
1870 <ti><path>/dev/sda1</path></ti>
1871 <ti>Swap slice</ti>
1872 </tr>
1873 <tr>
1874 <ti><path>/dev/sda2</path></ti>
1875 <ti>Root slice</ti>
1876 </tr>
1877 <tr>
1878 <ti><path>/dev/sda3</path></ti>
1879 <ti>Full disk (required)</ti>
1880 </tr>
1881 </table>
1882
1883 <p>
1884 Change your slice layout according to your own preference.
1885 </p>
1886
1887
1888 </body>
1889 </subsection>
1890 <subsection>
1891 <title>Identifying Available Disks</title>
1892 <body>
1893
1894 <p>
1895 To figure out what disks you have running, use the following commands:
1896 </p>
1897
1898 <pre caption="Identifying available disks">
1899 # <i>dmesg | grep 'drive$'</i> <comment>(For IDE disks)</comment>
1900 # <i>dmesg | grep 'scsi'</i> <comment>(For SCSI disks)</comment>
1901 </pre>
1902
1903 <p>
1904 >From this output you should be able to see what disks were detected and their
1905
1906
1907
1908 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-kernel.xml
1909
1910 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
1911 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
1912
1913 Index: hb-install-alpha-kernel.xml
1914 ===================================================================
1915 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
1916 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
1917
1918 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
1919 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
1920
1921 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-kernel.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
1922
1923 <sections>
1924
1925 <version>4.6</version>
1926 <date>2005-07-04</date>
1927
1928 <section>
1929 <title>Timezone</title>
1930 <body>
1931
1932 <p>
1933 You first need to select your timezone so that your system knows where it is
1934 located. Look for your timezone in <path>/usr/share/zoneinfo</path>, then make a
1935 symlink to <path>/etc/localtime</path> using <c>ln</c>:
1936 </p>
1937
1938 <pre caption="Setting the timezone information">
1939 # <i>ls /usr/share/zoneinfo</i>
1940 <comment>(Suppose you want to use GMT)</comment>
1941 # <i>ln -sf /usr/share/zoneinfo/GMT /etc/localtime</i>
1942 </pre>
1943
1944 </body>
1945 </section>
1946 <section>
1947 <title>Installing the Sources</title>
1948 <subsection>
1949 <title>Choosing a Kernel</title>
1950 <body>
1951
1952 <p>
1953 The core around which all distributions are built is the Linux kernel. It is the
1954 layer between the user programs and your system hardware. Gentoo provides its
1955 users several possible kernel sources. A full listing with description is
1956 available at the <uri link="/doc/en/gentoo-kernel.xml">Gentoo Kernel
1957 Guide</uri>.
1958 </p>
1959
1960 <p>
1961 For alpha-based systems we have <c>vanilla-sources</c> (the default 2.6 kernel source).
1962 </p>
1963
1964 <p>
1965 Choose your kernel source and install it using <c>emerge</c>.
1966 </p>
1967
1968 <p>
1969 In the next example we install the <c>vanilla-sources</c>.
1970 Of course substitute with your choice of sources, this is merely an example:
1971 </p>
1972
1973 <pre caption="Installing a kernel source">
1974 # <i>emerge vanilla-sources</i>
1975 </pre>
1976
1977 <p>
1978 When you take a look in <path>/usr/src</path> you should see a symlink called
1979 <path>linux</path> pointing to your kernel source:
1980 </p>
1981
1982 <pre caption="Viewing the kernel source symlink">
1983 # <i>ls -l /usr/src/linux</i>
1984 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 12 Oct 13 11:04 /usr/src/linux -&gt; linux-2.6.11.2
1985 </pre>
1986
1987 <p>
1988 If this isn't the case (i.e. the symlink points to a different kernel source)
1989 change the symlink before you continue:
1990 </p>
1991
1992 <pre caption="Changing the kernel source symlink">
1993 # <i>rm /usr/src/linux</i>
1994 # <i>cd /usr/src</i>
1995 # <i>ln -s linux-2.6.11.2 linux</i>
1996 </pre>
1997
1998 <p>
1999 Now it is time to configure and compile your kernel source. You
2000 can use <c>genkernel</c> for this, which will build a generic kernel as used
2001 by the Installation CD. We explain the "manual" configuration first though, as it is
2002 the best way to optimize your environment.
2003 </p>
2004
2005 <p>
2006 If you want to manually configure your kernel, continue now with <uri
2007 link="#manual">Default: Manual Configuration</uri>. If you want to use
2008 <c>genkernel</c> you should read <uri link="#genkernel">Alternative: Using
2009 genkernel</uri> instead.
2010 </p>
2011
2012 </body>
2013 </subsection>
2014 </section>
2015 <section id="manual">
2016 <title>Default: Manual Configuration</title>
2017 <subsection>
2018 <title>Introduction</title>
2019 <body>
2020
2021 <p>
2022 Manually configuring a kernel is often seen as the most difficult procedure a
2023 Linux user ever has to perform. Nothing is less true -- after configuring a
2024 couple of kernels you don't even remember that it was difficult ;)
2025 </p>
2026
2027 <p>
2028 However, one thing <e>is</e> true: you must know your system when you start
2029 configuring a kernel manually. You can run <c>lsmod</c> to see what kernel
2030 modules the Installation CD uses (it might provide you with a nice hint on
2031 what to enable).
2032 </p>
2033
2034 <p>
2035 Now go to your kernel source directory and execute <c>make menuconfig</c>. This
2036 will fire up an ncurses-based configuration menu.
2037 </p>
2038
2039 <pre caption="Invoking menuconfig">
2040 # <i>cd /usr/src/linux</i>
2041 # <i>make menuconfig</i>
2042 </pre>
2043
2044 <p>
2045 You will be greeted with several configuration sections. We'll first list some
2046 options you must activate (otherwise Gentoo will not function, or not function
2047 properly without additional tweaks).
2048 </p>
2049
2050 </body>
2051 </subsection>
2052 <subsection>
2053 <title>Activating Required Options</title>
2054 <body>
2055
2056 <p>
2057 First of all, activate the use of development and experimental code/drivers.
2058 You need this, otherwise some very important code/drivers won't show up:
2059 </p>
2060
2061 <pre caption="Selecting experimental code/drivers, General setup">
2062 Code maturity level options ---&gt;
2063 [*] Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers
2064 General setup ---&gt;
2065 [*] Support for hot-pluggable devices
2066 </pre>
2067
2068 <p>
2069 Now go to <c>File Systems</c> and select support for the filesystems you use.
2070 <e>Don't</e> compile them as modules, otherwise your Gentoo system will not be
2071 able to mount your partitions. Also select <c>Virtual memory</c>, <c>/proc
2072 file system</c>, (<c>/dev file system</c> + <c>Automatically mount at boot</c> only for 2.4 kernel):
2073 </p>
2074
2075 <pre caption="Selecting necessary file systems">
2076 <comment>(With a 2.4.x kernel)</comment>
2077 File systems ---&gt;
2078 [*] Virtual memory file system support (former shm fs)
2079 [*] /proc file system support
2080 [*] /dev file system support (EXPERIMENTAL)
2081 [*] Automatically mount at boot
2082 [ ] /dev/pts file system for Unix98 PTYs
2083
2084 <comment>(With a 2.6.x kernel)</comment>
2085 File systems ---&gt;
2086 Pseudo Filesystems ---&gt;
2087 [*] /proc file system support
2088 [ ] /dev file system support (OBSOLETE)
2089 [*] Virtual memory file system support (former shm fs)
2090
2091 <comment>(Select one or more of the following options as needed by your system)</comment>
2092 &lt;*&gt; Reiserfs support
2093 &lt;*&gt; Ext3 journalling file system support
2094 &lt;*&gt; JFS filesystem support
2095 &lt;*&gt; Second extended fs support
2096 &lt;*&gt; XFS filesystem support
2097 </pre>
2098
2099 <p>
2100 If you are using PPPoE to connect to the Internet or you are using a dial-up
2101 modem, you will need the following options in the kernel:
2102 </p>
2103
2104 <pre caption="Selecting PPPoE necessary drivers">
2105 <comment>(With a 2.4.x kernel)</comment>
2106 Network device support ---&gt;
2107 &lt;*&gt; PPP (point-to-point protocol) support
2108 &lt;*&gt; PPP support for async serial ports
2109 &lt;*&gt; PPP support for sync tty ports
2110
2111 <comment>(With a 2.6.x kernel)</comment>
2112 Device Drivers ---&gt;
2113 Networking support ---&gt;
2114
2115
2116
2117 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-medium.xml
2118
2119 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
2120 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
2121
2122 Index: hb-install-alpha-medium.xml
2123 ===================================================================
2124 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
2125 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
2126
2127 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
2128 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
2129
2130 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-alpha-medium.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
2131
2132 <sections>
2133
2134 <version>4.3</version>
2135 <date>2005-08-01</date>
2136
2137 <section>
2138 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
2139 <subsection>
2140 <title>Introduction</title>
2141 <body>
2142
2143 <p>
2144 Before we start, we first list what hardware requirements you need to
2145 successfully install Gentoo on your box.
2146 </p>
2147
2148 </body>
2149 </subsection>
2150 <subsection>
2151 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
2152 <body>
2153
2154 <table>
2155 <tr>
2156 <th>CPU</th>
2157 <ti>
2158 Please check with the <uri
2159 link="http://www.alphalinux.org/faq/FAQ-5.html">Alpha/Linux FAQ</uri>
2160 </ti>
2161 </tr>
2162 <tr>
2163 <th>Memory</th>
2164 <ti>64 MB</ti>
2165 </tr>
2166 <tr>
2167 <th>Diskspace</th>
2168 <ti>1.5 GB (excluding swap space)</ti>
2169 </tr>
2170 <tr>
2171 <th>Swap space</th>
2172 <ti>At least 256 MB</ti>
2173 </tr>
2174 </table>
2175
2176 </body>
2177 </subsection>
2178 </section>
2179 <!-- Copy/paste from the hb-install-x86-medium.xml file but no Universal
2180 Installation CD.
2181 Also s/x86/alpha -->
2182 <!-- START -->
2183 <section>
2184 <title>The Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
2185 <subsection>
2186 <title>Introduction</title>
2187 <body>
2188
2189 <p>
2190 Gentoo Linux can be installed using one of three <e>stage</e> tarball files.
2191 A stage file is a tarball (compressed archive) that contains a minimal
2192 environment.
2193 </p>
2194
2195 <ul>
2196 <li>
2197 A stage1 file contains nothing more than a compiler, Portage (Gentoo's
2198 software management system) and a couple of packages on which the compiler
2199 or Portage depends.
2200 </li>
2201 <li>
2202 A stage2 file contains a so-called bootstrapped system, a minimal
2203 environment from which one can start building all other necessary
2204 applications that make a Gentoo environment complete.
2205 </li>
2206 <li>
2207 A stage3 file contains a prebuilt minimal system which is almost fully
2208 deployable. It only lacks a few applications where you, the Gentoo user,
2209 needs to choose which one you want to install.
2210 </li>
2211 </ul>
2212
2213 <p>
2214 We will opt for a stage3 installation throughout this document. If you want to
2215 perform a Gentoo installation using the stage1 or stage2 files, please use the
2216 installation instructions in the <uri
2217 link="/doc/en/handbook/handbook-alpha.xml">Gentoo Handbook</uri>. They do
2218 require a working Internet connection though.
2219 </p>
2220
2221 </body>
2222 </subsection>
2223 <subsection>
2224 <title>Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
2225 <body>
2226
2227 <p>
2228 An Installation CD is a bootable medium which contains a self-sustained Gentoo
2229 environment. It allows you to boot Linux from the CD. During the boot process
2230 your hardware is detected and the appropriate drivers are loaded. The Gentoo
2231 Installation CDs are maintained by Gentoo developers.
2232 </p>
2233
2234 <p>
2235 There currently are two Installation CDs available:
2236 </p>
2237
2238 <ul>
2239 <li>
2240 The Universal Installation CD contains everything you need to install
2241 Gentoo. It provides stage3 files for common architectures, source code
2242 for the extra applications you need to choose from and, of course, the
2243 installation instructions for your architecture.
2244 </li>
2245 <li>
2246 The Minimal Installation CD contains only a minimal environment that allows
2247 you to boot up and configure your network so you can connect to the
2248 Internet. It does not contain any additional files and cannot be used
2249 during the current installation approach.
2250 </li>
2251 </ul>
2252
2253 <p>
2254 Gentoo also provides a Package CD. This is no Installation CD but an additional
2255 resource that you can exploit during the installation of your Gentoo system. It
2256 contains prebuilt packages (the so-called GRP set) that allows you to easily
2257 and quickly install additional applications (such as OpenOffice.org, KDE,
2258 GNOME, ...) immediately after the Gentoo installation and right before you
2259 update your Portage tree.
2260 </p>
2261
2262 <p>
2263 The use of the Package CD is covered later in this document.
2264 </p>
2265
2266 </body>
2267 </subsection>
2268 </section>
2269 <!-- STOP -->
2270 <section>
2271 <title>Download, Burn and Boot the Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
2272 <subsection>
2273 <title>Downloading and Burning the Installation CD</title>
2274 <body>
2275
2276 <p>
2277 You can download the Universal Installation CD (and, if you want to, the
2278 Packages CD as well) from one of our <uri
2279 link="/main/en/mirrors.xml">mirrors</uri>. The Installation CD is located in
2280 the <path>releases/alpha/2005.0/installcd</path> directory;
2281 the Package CD is located in the <path>releases/alpha/2005.0/packagecd</path>
2282 directory.
2283 </p>
2284
2285 <p>
2286 Inside those directories you'll find so-called ISO-files. Those are full CD
2287 images which you can write on a CD-R.
2288 </p>
2289
2290 <p>
2291 After downloading the file, you can verify its integrity to see if it is
2292 corrupted or not:
2293 </p>
2294
2295 <ul>
2296 <li>
2297 You can check its MD5 checksum and compare it with the MD5 checksum we
2298 provide (for instance with the <c>md5sum</c> tool under Linux/Unix or
2299 <uri link="http://www.etree.org/md5com.html">md5sum</uri> for Windows)
2300 </li>
2301 <li>
2302 You can verify the cryptographic signature that we provide. You need to
2303 obtain the public key we use (17072058) before you proceed though.
2304 </li>
2305 </ul>
2306
2307 <p>
2308 To fetch our public key using the GnuPG application, run the following command:
2309 </p>
2310
2311 <pre caption="Obtaining the public key">
2312 $ <i>gpg --keyserver pgp.mit.edu --recv-keys 17072058</i>
2313 </pre>
2314
2315 <p>
2316 Now verify the signature:
2317 </p>
2318
2319 <pre caption="Verify the cryptographic signature">
2320 $ <i>gpg --verify &lt;signature file&gt; &lt;downloaded iso&gt;</i>
2321 </pre>
2322
2323
2324
2325
2326 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-bootloader.xml
2327
2328 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
2329 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
2330
2331 Index: hb-install-amd64-bootloader.xml
2332 ===================================================================
2333 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
2334 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
2335
2336 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
2337 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
2338
2339 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-bootloader.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
2340
2341 <sections>
2342
2343 <version>4.6</version>
2344 <date>2005-06-10</date>
2345
2346 <section>
2347 <title>Making your Choice</title>
2348 <subsection>
2349 <title>Introduction</title>
2350 <body>
2351
2352 <p>
2353 Now that your kernel is configured and compiled and the necessary system
2354 configuration files are filled in correctly, it is time to install a
2355 program that will fire up your kernel when you start the system. Such a
2356 program is called a <e>bootloader</e>.
2357 </p>
2358
2359 </body>
2360 </subsection>
2361 <subsection>
2362 <title>Optional: Framebuffer</title>
2363 <body>
2364
2365 <!--
2366 Verbatim copy from x86 bootloader framebuffer explanation, minus the section on
2367 vesafb-tng
2368 -->
2369
2370 <p>
2371 <e>If</e> you have configured your kernel with framebuffer support (or you used
2372 <c>genkernel</c>'s default kernel configuration), you can activate it by adding
2373 a <c>vga</c> and/or a <c>video</c> statement to your bootloader configuration
2374 file.
2375 </p>
2376
2377 <p>
2378 64-bit systems must use the the <c>vesafb</c> driver, and so will need to set
2379 the <c>vga</c> statement. The <c>vga</c> statement controls the resolution and
2380 color depth of your framebuffer screen for <c>vesafb</c>. As stated in
2381 <path>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt</path> (which gets installed
2382 when you install a kernel source package), you need to pass the VESA number
2383 corresponding to the requested resolution and color depth to it.
2384 </p>
2385
2386 <p>
2387 The following table lists the available resolutions and colordepths and matches
2388 those against the value that you need to pass on to the <c>vga</c> statement.
2389 </p>
2390
2391 <table>
2392 <tr>
2393 <ti></ti>
2394 <th>640x480</th>
2395 <th>800x600</th>
2396 <th>1024x768</th>
2397 <th>1280x1024</th>
2398 </tr>
2399 <tr>
2400 <th>256</th>
2401 <ti>0x301</ti>
2402 <ti>0x303</ti>
2403 <ti>0x305</ti>
2404 <ti>0x307</ti>
2405 </tr>
2406 <tr>
2407 <th>32k</th>
2408 <ti>0x310</ti>
2409 <ti>0x313</ti>
2410 <ti>0x316</ti>
2411 <ti>0x319</ti>
2412 </tr>
2413 <tr>
2414 <th>64k</th>
2415 <ti>0x311</ti>
2416 <ti>0x314</ti>
2417 <ti>0x317</ti>
2418 <ti>0x31A</ti>
2419 </tr>
2420 <tr>
2421 <th>16M</th>
2422 <ti>0x312</ti>
2423 <ti>0x315</ti>
2424 <ti>0x318</ti>
2425 <ti>0x31B</ti>
2426 </tr>
2427 </table>
2428
2429 <p>
2430 The <c>video</c> statement controls framebuffer display options. It needs to be
2431 given the framebuffer driver (<c>vesafb</c> for 2.6 kernels, or <c>vesa</c> for
2432 2.4 kernels) followed by the control statements you wish to enable. All
2433 variables are listed in <path>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt</path>,
2434 but we'll inform you about three most-used options:
2435 </p>
2436
2437 <table>
2438 <tr>
2439 <th>Control</th>
2440 <th>Description</th>
2441 </tr>
2442 <tr>
2443 <ti>ywrap</ti>
2444 <ti>
2445 Assume that the graphical card can wrap around its memory (i.e. continue at
2446 the beginning when it has approached the end)
2447 </ti>
2448 </tr>
2449 <tr>
2450 <ti>mtrr</ti>
2451 <ti>
2452 Setup MTRR registers
2453 </ti>
2454 </tr>
2455 </table>
2456
2457 <p>
2458 The result of those two statements could be something like <c>vga=0x318
2459 video=vesafb:mtrr,ywrap</c> or <c>video=vesafb:mtrr,ywrap,1024x768-32@85</c>.
2460 Remember (or write down) this setting; you will need it shortly.
2461 </p>
2462
2463 <p>
2464 Now continue by installing GRUB.
2465 </p>
2466
2467 </body>
2468 </subsection>
2469 </section>
2470 <section>
2471 <title>Using GRUB</title>
2472 <subsection>
2473 <title>Understanding GRUB's terminology</title>
2474 <body>
2475
2476 <p>
2477 The most critical part of understanding GRUB is getting comfortable with
2478 how GRUB refers to hard drives and partitions. Your Linux partition
2479 <path>/dev/hda1</path> will most likely be called <path>(hd0,0)</path> under
2480 GRUB. Notice the parenthesis around the <path>hd0,0</path> - they are required.
2481 </p>
2482
2483 <p>
2484 Hard drives count from zero rather than "a" and partitions start at zero
2485 rather than one. Be aware too that with the hd devices, only hard drives are
2486 counted, not atapi-ide devices such as cdrom players and burners. Also, the
2487 same construct is used with scsi drives. (Normally they get higher numbers
2488 than ide drives except when the bios is configured to boot from scsi devices.)
2489 When you ask the BIOS to boot from a different hard disk (for instance your
2490 primary slave), <e>that</e> harddisk is seen as <path>hd0</path>.
2491 </p>
2492
2493 <p>
2494 Assuming you have a hard drive on <path>/dev/hda</path>, a cdrom player on
2495 <path>/dev/hdb</path>, a burner on <path>/dev/hdc</path>, a second hard drive
2496 on <path>/dev/hdd</path> and no SCSI hard drive, <path>/dev/hdd7</path> gets
2497 translated to <path>(hd1,6)</path>. It might sound tricky and tricky it is
2498 indeed, but as we will see, GRUB offers a tab completion mechanism
2499 that comes handy for those of you having a lot of hard drives and
2500 partitions and who are a little lost in the GRUB numbering scheme.
2501 </p>
2502
2503 <p>
2504 Having gotten the feel for that, it is time to install GRUB.
2505 </p>
2506
2507 </body>
2508 </subsection>
2509 <subsection>
2510 <title>Installing GRUB</title>
2511 <body>
2512
2513 <p>
2514 To install GRUB, let's first emerge it.
2515 </p>
2516
2517 <pre caption = "Installing GRUB">
2518 # <i>emerge grub</i>
2519 </pre>
2520
2521 <p>
2522 Although GRUB is now installed, we still need to write up a
2523 configuration file for it and install GRUB in the MBR so that GRUB
2524 automatically boots your newly created kernel. Create
2525 <path>/boot/grub/grub.conf</path> with <c>nano</c> (or, if applicable, another
2526 editor):
2527 </p>
2528
2529 <pre caption = "Creating /boot/grub/grub.conf">
2530 # <i>nano -w /boot/grub/grub.conf</i>
2531 </pre>
2532
2533
2534
2535 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-disk.xml
2536
2537 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
2538 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
2539
2540 Index: hb-install-amd64-disk.xml
2541 ===================================================================
2542 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
2543 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
2544
2545 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
2546 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.5 -->
2547
2548 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-disk.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
2549
2550 <sections>
2551
2552 <version>4.2</version>
2553 <date>2005-08-02</date>
2554
2555 <section>
2556 <title>Introduction to Block Devices</title>
2557 <subsection>
2558 <title>Block Devices</title>
2559 <body>
2560
2561 <p>
2562 We'll take a good look at disk-oriented aspects of Gentoo Linux
2563 and Linux in general, including Linux filesystems, partitions and block devices.
2564 Then, once you're familiar with the ins and outs of disks and filesystems,
2565 you'll be guided through the process of setting up partitions and filesystems
2566 for your Gentoo Linux installation.
2567 </p>
2568
2569 <p>
2570 To begin, we'll introduce <e>block devices</e>. The most famous block device is
2571 probably the one that represents the first IDE drive in a Linux system, namely
2572 <path>/dev/hda</path>. If your system uses SCSI drives, then your first hard
2573 drive would be <path>/dev/sda</path>.
2574 </p>
2575
2576 <p>
2577 The block devices above represent an abstract interface to the disk. User
2578 programs can use these block devices to interact with your disk without worrying
2579 about whether your drives are IDE, SCSI or something else. The program can
2580 simply address the storage on the disk as a bunch of contiguous,
2581 randomly-accessible 512-byte blocks.
2582 </p>
2583
2584 </body>
2585 </subsection>
2586 <subsection>
2587 <title>Partitions and Slices</title>
2588 <body>
2589
2590 <p>
2591 Although it is theoretically possible to use a full disk to house your Linux
2592 system, this is almost never done in practice. Instead, full disk block devices
2593 are split up in smaller, more manageable block devices. On amd64 systems,
2594 these are called <e>partitions</e>.
2595 </p>
2596
2597 </body>
2598 </subsection>
2599 <subsection>
2600 <title>Partitions</title>
2601 <body>
2602
2603 <p>
2604 Partitions are divided in three types:
2605 <e>primary</e>, <e>extended</e> and <e>logical</e>.
2606 </p>
2607
2608 <p>
2609 A <e>primary</e> partition is a partition which has its information stored in
2610 the MBR (master boot record). As an MBR is very small (512 bytes) only four
2611 primary partitions can be defined (for instance, <path>/dev/hda1</path> to
2612 <path>/dev/hda4</path>).
2613 </p>
2614
2615 <p>
2616 An <e>extended</e> partition is a special primary partition (meaning the
2617 extended partition must be one of the four possible primary partitions) which
2618 contains more partitions. Such a partition didn't exist originally, but as
2619 four partitions were too few, it was brought to life to extend the formatting
2620 scheme without losing backward compatibility.
2621 </p>
2622
2623 <p>
2624 A <e>logical</e> partition is a partition inside the extended partition. Their
2625 definitions aren't placed inside the MBR, but are declared inside the extended
2626 partition.
2627 </p>
2628
2629 </body>
2630 </subsection>
2631 </section>
2632 <section>
2633 <title>Designing a Partitioning Scheme</title>
2634 <subsection>
2635 <title>Default Partitioning Scheme</title>
2636 <body>
2637
2638 <p>
2639 If you are not interested in drawing up a partitioning scheme for your system,
2640 you can use the partitioning scheme we use throughout this book:
2641 </p>
2642
2643 <table>
2644 <tr>
2645 <th>Partition</th>
2646 <th>Filesystem</th>
2647 <th>Size</th>
2648 <th>Description</th>
2649 </tr>
2650 <tr>
2651 <ti><path>/dev/hda1</path></ti>
2652 <ti>ext2</ti>
2653 <ti>32M</ti>
2654 <ti>Boot partition</ti>
2655 </tr>
2656 <tr>
2657 <ti><path>/dev/hda2</path></ti>
2658 <ti>(swap)</ti>
2659 <ti>512M</ti>
2660 <ti>Swap partition</ti>
2661 </tr>
2662 <tr>
2663 <ti><path>/dev/hda3</path></ti>
2664 <ti>ext3</ti>
2665 <ti>Rest of the disk</ti>
2666 <ti>Root partition</ti>
2667 </tr>
2668 </table>
2669
2670 <p>
2671 If you are interested in knowing how big a partition (or logical
2672 volume) should be, or even how many partitions (or volumes) you need, read on.
2673 Otherwise continue with <uri link="#fdisk">Using fdisk to Partition your
2674 Disk</uri>.
2675 </p>
2676
2677 </body>
2678 </subsection>
2679 <subsection>
2680 <title>How Many and How Big?</title>
2681 <body>
2682
2683 <p>
2684 The number of partitions is highly dependent on your environment. For instance,
2685 if you have lots of users, you will most likely want to have your
2686 <path>/home</path> separate as it increases security and makes backups easier.
2687 If you are installing Gentoo to perform as a mailserver, your
2688 <path>/var</path> should be separate as all mails are stored inside
2689 <path>/var</path>. A good choice of filesystem will then maximise your
2690 performance. Gameservers will have a separate <path>/opt</path> as most gaming
2691 servers are installed there. The reason is similar for <path>/home</path>:
2692 security and backups. You will definitely want to keep <path>/usr</path> big:
2693 not only will it contain the majority of applications, the Portage tree alone
2694 takes around 500 Mbyte excluding the various sources that are stored in it.
2695 </p>
2696
2697 <p>
2698 As you can see, it very much depends on what you want to achieve. Separate
2699 partitions or volumes have the following advantages:
2700 </p>
2701
2702 <ul>
2703 <li>
2704 You can choose the best performing filesystem for each partition or volume
2705 </li>
2706 <li>
2707 Your entire system cannot run out of free space if one defunct tool is
2708 continuously writing files to a partition or volume
2709 </li>
2710 <li>
2711 If necessary, file system checks are reduced in time, as multiple checks can
2712 be done in parallel (although this advantage is more with multiple disks than
2713 it is with multiple partitions)
2714 </li>
2715 <li>
2716 Security can be enhanced by mounting some partitions or volumes read-only,
2717 nosuid (setuid bits are ignored), noexec (executable bits are ignored) etc.
2718 </li>
2719 </ul>
2720
2721 <p>
2722 However, multiple partitions have one big disadvantage: if not configured
2723 properly, you might result in having a system with lots
2724 of free space on one partition and none on another. There is also a 15-partition
2725 limit for SCSI and SATA.
2726 </p>
2727
2728 <p>
2729 As an example partitioning, we show you one for a 20GB disk, used as a
2730 demonstration laptop (containing webserver, mailserver, gnome, ...):
2731 </p>
2732
2733 <pre caption="Filesystem usage example">
2734 Filesystem Type Size Used Avail Use% Mounted on
2735 /dev/hda5 ext3 509M 132M 351M 28% /
2736 /dev/hda2 ext3 5.0G 3.0G 1.8G 63% /home
2737 /dev/hda7 ext3 7.9G 6.2G 1.3G 83% /usr
2738 /dev/hda8 ext3 1011M 483M 477M 51% /opt
2739 /dev/hda9 ext3 2.0G 607M 1.3G 32% /var
2740 /dev/hda1 ext2 51M 17M 31M 36% /boot
2741
2742
2743
2744 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-kernel.xml
2745
2746 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
2747 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
2748
2749 Index: hb-install-amd64-kernel.xml
2750 ===================================================================
2751 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
2752 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
2753
2754 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
2755 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
2756
2757 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-kernel.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
2758
2759 <sections>
2760
2761 <version>4.8</version>
2762 <date>2005-07-04</date>
2763
2764 <section>
2765 <title>Timezone</title>
2766 <body>
2767
2768 <p>
2769 You first need to select your timezone so that your system knows where it is
2770 located. Look for your timezone in <path>/usr/share/zoneinfo</path>, then make a
2771 symlink to <path>/etc/localtime</path> using <c>ln</c>:
2772 </p>
2773
2774 <pre caption="Setting the timezone information">
2775 # <i>ls /usr/share/zoneinfo</i>
2776 <comment>(Suppose you want to use GMT)</comment>
2777 # <i>ln -sf /usr/share/zoneinfo/GMT /etc/localtime</i>
2778 </pre>
2779
2780 </body>
2781 </section>
2782 <section>
2783 <title>Installing the Sources</title>
2784 <subsection>
2785 <title>Choosing a Kernel</title>
2786 <body>
2787
2788 <p>
2789 The core around which all distributions are built is the Linux kernel. It is the
2790 layer between the user programs and your system hardware. Gentoo provides its
2791 users several possible kernel sources. A full listing with description is
2792 available at the <uri link="/doc/en/gentoo-kernel.xml">Gentoo Kernel
2793 Guide</uri>.
2794 </p>
2795
2796 <p>
2797 For AMD64-based systems we have <c>gentoo-sources</c> (kernel v2.6 source
2798 patched with amd64 specific fixes for stability, performance and hardware
2799 support).
2800 </p>
2801
2802 <p>
2803 Choose your kernel source and install it using <c>emerge</c>.
2804 </p>
2805
2806 <note>
2807 Running <c>emerge gentoo-sources</c> will fail due to a bug with the Universal
2808 Installation CD. Please make sure you run <c>emerge
2809 =gentoo-sources-2.6.11-r1</c> instead. This has no further effect on your
2810 environment as Portage will automatically download a more recent kernel source
2811 when updating your system (after the installation).
2812 </note>
2813
2814 <pre caption="Installing a kernel source">
2815 # <i>echo "=sys-kernel/gentoo-sources-2.6.11-r1 ~amd64" &gt;&gt; /etc/portage/package.keywords</i>
2816 # <i>emerge =gentoo-sources-2.6.11-r1</i>
2817 </pre>
2818
2819 <p>
2820 When you take a look in <path>/usr/src</path> you should see a symlink called
2821 <path>linux</path> pointing to your kernel source:
2822 </p>
2823
2824 <pre caption="Viewing the kernel source symlink">
2825 # <i>ls -l /usr/src/linux</i>
2826 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 12 Oct 13 11:04 /usr/src/linux -&gt; linux-2.6.11-gentoo-r1
2827 </pre>
2828
2829 <p>
2830 If this isn't the case (i.e. the symlink points to a different kernel source)
2831 change the symlink before you continue:
2832 </p>
2833
2834 <pre caption="Changing the kernel source symlink">
2835 # <i>rm /usr/src/linux</i>
2836 # <i>cd /usr/src</i>
2837 # <i>ln -s linux-2.6.11-gentoo-r1 linux</i>
2838 </pre>
2839
2840 <p>
2841 Now it is time to configure and compile your kernel source.
2842 You can use <c>genkernel</c> for this, which will build a generic kernel as used
2843 by the Installation CD. We explain the "manual" configuration first though, as
2844 it is the best way to optimize your environment.
2845 </p>
2846
2847 <p>
2848 If you want to manually configure your kernel, continue now with <uri
2849 link="#manual">Default: Manual Configuration</uri>. If you want to use
2850 <c>genkernel</c> you should read <uri link="#genkernel">Alternative: Using
2851 genkernel</uri> instead.
2852 </p>
2853
2854 </body>
2855 </subsection>
2856 </section>
2857 <section id="manual">
2858 <title>Default: Manual Configuration</title>
2859 <subsection>
2860 <title>Introduction</title>
2861 <body>
2862
2863 <p>
2864 Manually configuring a kernel is often seen as the most difficult procedure a
2865 Linux user ever has to perform. Nothing is less true -- after configuring a
2866 couple of kernels you don't even remember that it was difficult ;)
2867 </p>
2868
2869 <p>
2870 However, one thing <e>is</e> true: you must know your system when you start
2871 configuring a kernel manually. Most information can be gathered by emerging
2872 pciutils (<c>emerge pciutils</c>) which contains <c>lspci</c>. You will now
2873 be able to use <c>lspci</c> within the chrooted environment. You may safely
2874 ignore any <e>pcilib</e> warnings (like pcilib: cannot open
2875 /sys/bus/pci/devices) that <c>lspci</c> throws out. Alternatively, you can run
2876 <c>lspci</c> from a <e>non-chrooted</e> environment. The results are the same.
2877 You can also run <c>lsmod</c> to see what kernel modules the Installation CD
2878 uses (it might provide you with a nice hint on what to enable).
2879 </p>
2880
2881 <p>
2882 Now go to your kernel source directory and execute <c>make menuconfig</c>. This
2883 will fire up an ncurses-based configuration menu.
2884 </p>
2885
2886 <pre caption="Invoking menuconfig">
2887 # <i>cd /usr/src/linux</i>
2888 # <i>make menuconfig</i>
2889 </pre>
2890
2891 <p>
2892 You will be greeted with several configuration sections. We'll first list some
2893 options you must activate (otherwise Gentoo will not function, or not function
2894 properly without additional tweaks).
2895 </p>
2896
2897 </body>
2898 </subsection>
2899 <subsection>
2900 <title>Activating Required Options</title>
2901 <body>
2902
2903 <p>
2904 First of all, activate the use of development and experimental code/drivers.
2905 You need this, otherwise some very important code/drivers won't show up:
2906 </p>
2907
2908 <pre caption="Selecting experimental code/drivers, General setup">
2909 Code maturity level options ---&gt;
2910 [*] Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers
2911 General setup ---&gt;
2912 [*] Support for hot-pluggable devices
2913 </pre>
2914
2915 <p>
2916 Now go to <c>File Systems</c> and select support for the filesystems you use.
2917 <e>Don't</e> compile them as modules, otherwise your Gentoo system will not be
2918 able to mount your partitions. Also select <c>Virtual memory</c> and <c>/proc
2919 file system</c>. Do <e>not</e> select <c>/dev file system</c> since 2005.0/AMD64
2920 uses <c>udev</c> by default.
2921 </p>
2922
2923 <pre caption="Selecting necessary file systems">
2924 File systems ---&gt;
2925 Pseudo Filesystems ---&gt;
2926 &lt;*&gt; /proc file system support
2927 &lt; &gt; /dev file system support (OBSOLETE)
2928 &lt;*&gt; Virtual memory file system support (former shm fs)
2929
2930
2931 <comment>(Select one or more of the following options as needed by your system)</comment>
2932 &lt;*&gt; Reiserfs support
2933 &lt;*&gt; Ext3 journalling file system support
2934 &lt;*&gt; JFS filesystem support
2935 &lt;*&gt; Second extended fs support
2936 &lt;*&gt; XFS filesystem support
2937 </pre>
2938
2939 <p>
2940 If you are using PPPoE to connect to the Internet or you are using a dial-up
2941 modem, you will need the following options in the kernel:
2942 </p>
2943
2944 <pre caption="Selecting PPPoE necessary drivers">
2945 Device Drivers ---&gt;
2946 Networking Support ---&gt;
2947 &lt;*&gt; PPP (point-to-point protocol) support
2948 &lt;*&gt; PPP support for async serial ports
2949 &lt;*&gt; PPP support for sync tty ports
2950
2951
2952
2953 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-medium.xml
2954
2955 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
2956 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
2957
2958 Index: hb-install-amd64-medium.xml
2959 ===================================================================
2960 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
2961 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
2962
2963 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
2964 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
2965
2966 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-amd64-medium.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
2967
2968 <sections>
2969
2970 <version>4.21</version>
2971 <date>2005-05-06</date>
2972
2973 <section>
2974 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
2975 <subsection>
2976 <title>Introduction</title>
2977 <body>
2978
2979 <p>
2980 Before we start, we first list what hardware requirements you need to
2981 successfully install Gentoo on your box.
2982 </p>
2983
2984 </body>
2985 </subsection>
2986 <subsection>
2987 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
2988 <body>
2989
2990 <table>
2991 <tr>
2992 <th>CPU</th>
2993 <ti>Any AMD64 CPU *</ti>
2994 </tr>
2995 <tr>
2996 <th>Memory</th>
2997 <ti>64 MB</ti>
2998 </tr>
2999 <tr>
3000 <th>Diskspace</th>
3001 <ti>1.5 GB (excluding swap space)</ti>
3002 </tr>
3003 <tr>
3004 <th>Swap space</th>
3005 <ti>At least 256 MB</ti>
3006 </tr>
3007 </table>
3008
3009 <note>
3010 * Intel processors with EM64T extensions <e>might</e> work as well, but are
3011 untested.
3012 </note>
3013
3014 <p>
3015 You should check the <uri link="http://amd64.gentoo.org">Gentoo
3016 AMD64 Project Page</uri> before proceeding.
3017 </p>
3018
3019 </body>
3020 </subsection>
3021 </section>
3022 <!-- Copy/paste from hb-install-x86-medium.xml (with s/x86/amd64/) -->
3023 <!-- START -->
3024 <section>
3025 <title>The Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
3026 <subsection>
3027 <title>Introduction</title>
3028 <body>
3029
3030 <p>
3031 Gentoo Linux can be installed using one of three <e>stage</e> tarball files. A
3032 stage file is a tarball (compressed archive) that contains a minimal
3033 environment.
3034 </p>
3035
3036 <ul>
3037 <li>
3038 A stage1 file contains nothing more than a compiler, Portage (Gentoo's
3039 software management system) and a couple of packages on which the
3040 compiler or Portage depends.
3041 </li>
3042 <li>
3043 A stage2 file contains a so-called bootstrapped system, a minimal
3044 environment from which one can start building all other necessary
3045 applications that make a Gentoo environment complete.
3046 </li>
3047 <li>
3048 A stage3 file contains a prebuilt minimal system which is almost fully
3049 deployable. It only lacks a few applications where you, the Gentoo user,
3050 needs to choose which one you want to install.
3051 </li>
3052 </ul>
3053
3054 <p>
3055 We will opt for a stage3 installation throughout this document. If you want to
3056 perform a Gentoo installation using the stage1 or stage2 files, please use the
3057 installation instructions in the <uri
3058 link="/doc/en/handbook/handbook-amd64.xml">Gentoo Handbook</uri>. They do
3059 require a working Internet connection though.
3060 </p>
3061
3062 </body>
3063 </subsection>
3064 <subsection>
3065 <title>Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
3066 <body>
3067
3068 <p>
3069 An Installation CD is a bootable medium which contains a self-sustained Gentoo
3070 environment. It allows you to boot Linux from the CD. During the boot process
3071 your hardware is detected and the appropriate drivers are loaded. The Gentoo
3072 Installation CDs are maintained by Gentoo developers.
3073 </p>
3074
3075 <p>
3076 There currently are two Installation CDs available:
3077 </p>
3078
3079 <ul>
3080 <li>
3081 The Universal Installation CD contains everything you need to install
3082 Gentoo. It provides stage3 files for common architectures, source code
3083 for the extra applications you need to choose from and, of course, the
3084 installation instructions for your architecture.
3085 </li>
3086 <li>
3087 The Minimal Installation CD contains only a minimal environment that allows
3088 you to boot up and configure your network so you can connect to the
3089 Internet. It does not contain any additional files and cannot be used
3090 during the current installation approach.
3091 </li>
3092 </ul>
3093
3094 <p>
3095 Gentoo also provides a Package CD. This is no Installation CD but an additional
3096 resource that you can exploit during the installation of your Gentoo system. It
3097 contains prebuilt packages (the so-called GRP set) that allows you to easily
3098 and quickly install additional applications (such as OpenOffice.org, KDE,
3099 GNOME, ...) immediately after the Gentoo installation and right before you
3100 update your Portage tree.
3101 </p>
3102
3103 <p>
3104 The use of the Package CD is covered later in this document.
3105 </p>
3106
3107 </body>
3108 </subsection>
3109 </section>
3110 <!-- STOP -->
3111 <section>
3112 <title>Download, Burn and Boot the Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
3113 <subsection>
3114 <title>Downloading and Burning the Installation CD</title>
3115 <body>
3116
3117 <p>
3118 You can download the Universal Installation CD (and, if you want to, the
3119 Packages CD as well) from one of our <uri
3120 link="/main/en/mirrors.xml">mirrors</uri>. The Installation CD is located in
3121 the <path>releases/amd64/2005.0/installcd</path> directory;
3122 the Package CD is located in the <path>releases/amd64/2005.0/packagecd</path>
3123 directory.
3124 </p>
3125
3126 <p>
3127 Inside those directories you'll find so-called ISO-files. Those are full CD
3128 images which you can write on a CD-R.
3129 </p>
3130
3131 <p>
3132 After downloading the file, you can verify its integrity to see if it is
3133 corrupted or not:
3134 </p>
3135
3136 <ul>
3137 <li>
3138 You can check its MD5 checksum and compare it with the MD5 checksum we
3139 provide (for instance with the <c>md5sum</c> tool under Linux/Unix or
3140 <uri link="http://www.etree.org/md5com.html">md5sum</uri> for Windows)
3141 </li>
3142 <li>
3143 You can verify the cryptographic signature that we provide. You need to
3144 obtain the public key we use (17072058) before you proceed though.
3145 </li>
3146 </ul>
3147
3148 <p>
3149 To fetch our public key using the GnuPG application, run the following command:
3150 </p>
3151
3152 <pre caption="Obtaining the public key">
3153 $ <i>gpg --keyserver pgp.mit.edu --recv-keys 17072058</i>
3154 </pre>
3155
3156 <p>
3157 Now verify the signature:
3158 </p>
3159
3160
3161
3162 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-config.xml
3163
3164 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-config.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
3165 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-config.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
3166
3167 Index: hb-install-config.xml
3168 ===================================================================
3169 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
3170 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
3171
3172 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
3173 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
3174
3175 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-config.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
3176
3177 <sections>
3178
3179 <version>4.2</version>
3180 <date>2005-05-23</date>
3181
3182 <section>
3183 <title>Filesystem Information</title>
3184 <subsection>
3185 <title>What is fstab?</title>
3186 <body>
3187
3188 <p>
3189 Under Linux, all partitions used by the system must be listed in
3190 <path>/etc/fstab</path>. This file contains the mountpoints of those partitions
3191 (where they are seen in the file system structure), how they should be mounted
3192 and with what special options (automatically or not, whether users can mount
3193 them or not, etc.)
3194 </p>
3195
3196 </body>
3197 </subsection>
3198 <subsection>
3199 <title>Creating /etc/fstab</title>
3200 <body>
3201
3202 <p>
3203 <path>/etc/fstab</path> uses a special syntax. Every line consists of six
3204 fields, separated by whitespace (space(s), tabs or a mixture). Each field has
3205 its own meaning:
3206 </p>
3207
3208 <ul>
3209 <li>
3210 The first field shows the <b>partition</b> described (the path to the device
3211 file)
3212 </li>
3213 <li>
3214 The second field shows the <b>mountpoint</b> at which the partition should be
3215 mounted
3216 </li>
3217 <li>
3218 The third field shows the <b>filesystem</b> used by the partition
3219 </li>
3220 <li>
3221 The fourth field shows the <b>mountoptions</b> used by <c>mount</c> when it
3222 wants to mount the partition. As every filesystem has its own mountoptions,
3223 you are encouraged to read the mount man page (<c>man mount</c>) for a full
3224 listing. Multiple mountoptions are comma-separated.
3225 </li>
3226 <li>
3227 The fifth field is used by <c>dump</c> to determine if the partition needs to
3228 be <b>dump</b>ed or not. You can generally leave this as <c>0</c> (zero).
3229 </li>
3230 <li>
3231 The sixth field is used by <c>fsck</c> to determine the order in which
3232 filesystems should be <b>check</b>ed if the system wasn't shut down properly.
3233 The root filesystem should have <c>1</c> while the rest should have <c>2</c>
3234 (or <c>0</c> if a filesystem check isn't necessary).
3235 </li>
3236 </ul>
3237
3238 <p>
3239 The default <path>/etc/fstab</path> file provided by Gentoo <e>is no valid fstab
3240 file</e>, so start <c>nano</c> (or your favorite editor) to create your
3241 <path>/etc/fstab</path>:
3242 </p>
3243
3244 <pre caption="Opening /etc/fstab">
3245 # <i>nano -w /etc/fstab</i>
3246 </pre>
3247
3248 <p>
3249 Let us take a look at how we write down the options for the <path>/boot</path>
3250 partition. This is just an example, so if your architecture doesn't require a
3251 <path>/boot</path> partition (such as <b>PPC</b>), don't copy it verbatim.
3252 </p>
3253
3254 <p>
3255 In our default x86 partitioning example <path>/boot</path> is the
3256 <path>/dev/hda1</path> partition, with <c>ext2</c> as filesystem.
3257 It needs to be checked during boot, so we would write down:
3258 </p>
3259
3260 <pre caption="An example /boot line for /etc/fstab">
3261 /dev/hda1 /boot ext2 defaults 1 2
3262 </pre>
3263
3264 <p>
3265 Some users don't want their <path>/boot</path> partition to be mounted
3266 automatically to improve their system's security. Those people should
3267 substitute <c>defaults</c> with <c>noauto</c>. This does mean that you need to
3268 manually mount this partition every time you want to use it.
3269 </p>
3270
3271 <p>
3272 Now, to improve performance, most users would want to add the <c>noatime</c>
3273 option as mountoption, which results in a faster system since access times
3274 aren't registered (you don't need those generally anyway):
3275 </p>
3276
3277 <pre caption="An improved /boot line for /etc/fstab">
3278 /dev/hda1 /boot ext2 defaults,noatime 1 2
3279 </pre>
3280
3281 <p>
3282 If we continue with this, we would end up with the following three lines (for
3283 <path>/boot</path>, <path>/</path> and the swap partition):
3284 </p>
3285
3286 <pre caption="Three /etc/fstab lines">
3287 /dev/hda1 /boot ext2 defaults,noatime 1 2
3288 /dev/hda2 none swap sw 0 0
3289 /dev/hda3 / ext3 noatime 0 1
3290 </pre>
3291
3292 <p>
3293 To finish up, you should add a rule for <path>/proc</path>, <c>tmpfs</c>
3294 (required) and for your CD-ROM drive (and of course, if you have other
3295 partitions or drives, for those too):
3296 </p>
3297
3298 <pre caption="A full /etc/fstab example">
3299 /dev/hda1 /boot ext2 defaults,noatime 1 2
3300 /dev/hda2 none swap sw 0 0
3301 /dev/hda3 / ext3 noatime 0 1
3302
3303 none /proc proc defaults 0 0
3304 none /dev/shm tmpfs nodev,nosuid,noexec 0 0
3305
3306 /dev/cdroms/cdrom0 /mnt/cdrom auto noauto,user 0 0
3307 </pre>
3308
3309 <p>
3310 <c>auto</c> makes <c>mount</c> guess for the filesystem (recommended for
3311 removable media as they can be created with one of many filesystems) and
3312 <c>user</c> makes it possible for non-root users to mount the CD.
3313 </p>
3314
3315 <p>
3316 Now use the above example to create your <path>/etc/fstab</path>. If you are a
3317 <b>SPARC</b>-user, you should add the following line to your
3318 <path>/etc/fstab</path>
3319 too:
3320 </p>
3321
3322 <pre caption="Adding openprom filesystem to /etc/fstab">
3323 none /proc/openprom openpromfs defaults 0 0
3324 </pre>
3325
3326 <p>
3327 Double-check your <path>/etc/fstab</path>, save and quit to continue.
3328 </p>
3329
3330 </body>
3331 </subsection>
3332 </section>
3333 <section>
3334 <title>Networking Information</title>
3335 <subsection>
3336 <title>Hostname, Domainname etc.</title>
3337 <body>
3338
3339 <p>
3340 One of the choices the user has to make is name his/her PC. This seems to be
3341 quite easy, but <e>lots</e> of users are having difficulties finding the
3342 appropriate name for their Linux-pc. To speed things up, know that any name you
3343 choose can be changed afterwards. For all we care, you can just call your system
3344 <c>tux</c> and domain <c>homenetwork</c>.
3345 </p>
3346
3347 <p>
3348 We use these values in the next examples. First we set the hostname:
3349 </p>
3350
3351 <pre caption="Setting the hostname">
3352 # <i>echo tux &gt; /etc/hostname</i>
3353 </pre>
3354
3355 <p>
3356 Second we set the domainname:
3357 </p>
3358
3359 <pre caption="Setting the domainname">
3360 # <i>echo homenetwork &gt; /etc/dnsdomainname</i>
3361 </pre>
3362
3363 <p>
3364 If you have a NIS domain (if you don't know what that is, then you don't have
3365 one), you need to define that one too:
3366 </p>
3367
3368
3369
3370
3371 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-finalise.xml
3372
3373 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-finalise.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
3374 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-finalise.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
3375
3376 Index: hb-install-finalise.xml
3377 ===================================================================
3378 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
3379 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
3380
3381 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
3382 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
3383
3384 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-finalise.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
3385
3386 <sections>
3387
3388 <version>4.00</version>
3389 <date>2005-03-21</date>
3390
3391 <section>
3392 <title>User Administration</title>
3393 <subsection>
3394 <title>Adding a User for Daily Use</title>
3395 <body>
3396
3397 <p>
3398 Working as root on a Unix/Linux system is <e>dangerous</e> and should be avoided
3399 as much as possible. Therefore it is <e>strongly</e> recommended to add a user
3400 for day-to-day use.
3401 </p>
3402
3403 <p>
3404 The groups the user is member of define what activities the user can perform.
3405 The following table lists a number of important groups you might wish to use:
3406 </p>
3407
3408 <table>
3409 <tr>
3410 <th>Group</th>
3411 <th>Description</th>
3412 </tr>
3413 <tr>
3414 <ti>audio</ti>
3415 <ti>be able to access the audio devices</ti>
3416 </tr>
3417 <tr>
3418 <ti>cdrom</ti>
3419 <ti>be able to directly access optical devices</ti>
3420 </tr>
3421 <tr>
3422 <ti>floppy</ti>
3423 <ti>be able to directly access floppy devices</ti>
3424 </tr>
3425 <tr>
3426 <ti>games</ti>
3427 <ti>be able to play games</ti>
3428 </tr>
3429 <tr>
3430 <ti>usb</ti>
3431 <ti>be able to access USB devices</ti>
3432 </tr>
3433 <tr>
3434 <ti>video</ti>
3435 <ti>
3436 be able to access video capturing hardware and doing hardware
3437 acceleration
3438 </ti>
3439 </tr>
3440 <tr>
3441 <ti>wheel</ti>
3442 <ti>be able to use <c>su</c></ti>
3443 </tr>
3444 </table>
3445
3446 <p>
3447 For instance, to create a user called <c>john</c> who is member of the
3448 <c>wheel</c>, <c>users</c> and <c>audio</c> groups, log in as root first
3449 (only root can create users) and run <c>useradd</c>:
3450 </p>
3451
3452 <pre caption="Adding a user for day-to-day use">
3453 Login: <i>root</i>
3454 Password: <comment>(Your root password)</comment>
3455
3456 # <i>useradd -m -G users,wheel,audio -s /bin/bash john</i>
3457 # <i>passwd john</i>
3458 Password: <comment>(Enter the password for john)</comment>
3459 Re-enter password: <comment>(Re-enter the password to verify)</comment>
3460 </pre>
3461
3462 <p>
3463 If a user ever needs to perform some task as root, they can use <c>su -</c>
3464 to temporarily receive root privileges. Another way is to use the <c>sudo</c>
3465 package which is, if correctly configured, very secure.
3466 </p>
3467
3468 </body>
3469 </subsection>
3470 </section>
3471 <section>
3472 <title>Optional: Install GRP Packages</title>
3473 <body>
3474
3475 <impo>
3476 This part is for GRP users only. Other users should skip this part and continue
3477 with <uri link="?part=1&amp;chap=12">Where to go from here?</uri>.
3478 </impo>
3479
3480 <p>
3481 Now that your system is booted, log on as the user you created (for instance,
3482 <c>john</c>) and use <c>su -</c> to gain root privileges:
3483 </p>
3484
3485 <pre caption="Gaining root privileges">
3486 $ <i>su -</i>
3487 Password: <comment>(Enter your root password)</comment>
3488 </pre>
3489
3490 <p>
3491 Now we need to change the Portage configuration to look for the prebuilt
3492 binaries from the second CD (Gentoo Packages CD). First mount this CD:
3493 </p>
3494
3495 <pre caption="Mount the Packages CD">
3496 <comment>(Put the Gentoo Packages CD in the CD tray)</comment>
3497 # <i>mount /mnt/cdrom</i>
3498 </pre>
3499
3500 <p>
3501 Now configure Portage to use <path>/mnt/cdrom</path> for its prebuilt packages:
3502 </p>
3503
3504 <pre caption="Configuring Portage to use /mnt/cdrom">
3505 # <i>ls /mnt/cdrom</i>
3506
3507 <comment>(If there is a /mnt/cdrom/packages directory:)</comment>
3508 # <i>export PKGDIR="/mnt/cdrom/packages"</i>
3509
3510 <comment>(Otherwise:)</comment>
3511 # <i>export PKGDIR="/mnt/cdrom"</i>
3512 </pre>
3513
3514 <p>
3515 Now install the packages you want. The Packages CD contains several prebuilt
3516 binaries, for instance KDE:
3517 </p>
3518
3519 <pre caption="Installing KDE">
3520 # <i>emerge --usepkg kde</i>
3521 </pre>
3522
3523 <p>
3524 Be sure to install the binaries now. When you do an <c>emerge --sync</c> to
3525 update Portage (as you will learn later), the prebuilt binaries might not match
3526 against the ebuilds in your updated Portage. You can try to circumvent this by
3527 using <c>emerge --usepkgonly</c> instead of <c>emerge --usepkg</c>.
3528 </p>
3529
3530 <p>
3531 Congratulations, your system is now fully equipped! Continue with <uri
3532 link="?part=1&amp;chap=12">Where to go from here?</uri> to learn more about
3533 Gentoo.
3534 </p>
3535
3536 </body>
3537 </section>
3538 </sections>
3539
3540
3541
3542 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-bootloader.xml
3543
3544 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
3545 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
3546
3547 Index: hb-install-hppa-bootloader.xml
3548 ===================================================================
3549 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
3550 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
3551
3552 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
3553 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
3554
3555 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-bootloader.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
3556
3557 <sections>
3558
3559 <version>4.00</version>
3560 <date>2004-09-24</date>
3561
3562 <section>
3563 <title>Installing PALO</title>
3564 <body>
3565
3566 <p>
3567 On the PA-RISC platform, the boot loader is called palo. You can find
3568 the configuration file in <path>/etc/palo.conf</path>. Here is a sample
3569 configuration:
3570 </p>
3571
3572 <pre caption = "/etc/palo.conf example">
3573 --commandline=2/vmlinux root=/dev/sdb2 HOME=/
3574 --recoverykernel=/vmlinux.old
3575 --init-partitioned=/dev/sdb
3576 </pre>
3577
3578 <p>
3579 The first line tells palo the location of the kernel and which boot
3580 parameters it must use. <c>2/vmlinux</c> means the kernel named <c>/vmlinux</c>
3581 resides on the second partition. Beware, the path to the kernel is
3582 relative to the partition, not to the root of your filesystem.
3583 </p>
3584
3585 <p>
3586 The second line indicates which recovery kernel to use. If it is your
3587 first install and you do not have a recovery kernel, please comment this
3588 out. The third line indicates on which disk palo will reside.
3589 </p>
3590
3591 <p>
3592 When configuration is done, just run <c>palo</c>.
3593 </p>
3594
3595 <pre caption = "Applying the PALO configuration">
3596 # <i>palo</i>
3597 </pre>
3598
3599 <p>
3600 Now continue with <uri link="#reboot">Rebooting the System</uri>.
3601 </p>
3602
3603 </body>
3604 </section>
3605 <section id="reboot">
3606 <title>Rebooting the System</title>
3607 <subsection>
3608 <body>
3609
3610 <p>
3611 Exit the chrooted environment and unmount all mounted partitions. Then type in
3612 that one magical command you have been waiting for: <c>reboot</c>.
3613 </p>
3614
3615 <pre caption="Exiting the chroot, unmounting all partitions and rebooting">
3616 # <i>exit</i>
3617 cdimage ~# <i>cd</i>
3618 cdimage ~# <i>umount /mnt/gentoo/boot /mnt/gentoo/proc /mnt/gentoo</i>
3619 cdimage ~# <i>reboot</i>
3620 </pre>
3621
3622 <p>
3623 Of course, don't forget to remove the bootable CD, otherwise the CD will be
3624 booted again instead of your new Gentoo system.
3625 </p>
3626
3627 <p>
3628 Once rebooted in your Gentoo installation, finish up with <uri
3629 link="?part=1&amp;chap=11">Finalizing your Gentoo Installation</uri>.
3630 </p>
3631
3632 </body>
3633 </subsection>
3634 </section>
3635 </sections>
3636
3637
3638
3639 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-disk.xml
3640
3641 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
3642 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
3643
3644 Index: hb-install-hppa-disk.xml
3645 ===================================================================
3646 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
3647 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
3648
3649 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
3650 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.5 -->
3651
3652 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-disk.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
3653
3654 <sections>
3655
3656 <version>4.2</version>
3657 <date>2005-08-02</date>
3658
3659 <section>
3660 <title>Introduction to Block Devices</title>
3661 <subsection>
3662 <title>Block Devices</title>
3663 <body>
3664
3665 <p>
3666 We'll take a good look at disk-oriented aspects of Gentoo Linux
3667 and Linux in general, including Linux filesystems, partitions and block devices.
3668 Then, once you're familiar with the ins and outs of disks and filesystems,
3669 you'll be guided through the process of setting up partitions and filesystems
3670 for your Gentoo Linux installation.
3671 </p>
3672
3673 <p>
3674 To begin, we'll introduce <e>block devices</e>. The most famous block device is
3675 probably the one that represents the first SCSI HD in a Linux system, namely
3676 <path>/dev/sda</path>.
3677 </p>
3678
3679 <p>
3680 The block devices above represent an abstract interface to the disk. User
3681 programs can use these block devices to interact with your disk without worrying
3682 about whether your drives are IDE, SCSI or something else. The program can
3683 simply address the storage on the disk as a bunch of contiguous,
3684 randomly-accessible 512-byte blocks.
3685 </p>
3686
3687 </body>
3688 </subsection>
3689 <subsection>
3690 <title>Partitions and Slices</title>
3691 <body>
3692
3693 <p>
3694 Although it is theoretically possible to use a full disk to house your Linux
3695 system, this is almost never done in practice. Instead, full disk block devices
3696 are split up in smaller, more manageable block devices. On most systems,
3697 these are called <e>partitions</e>. Other architectures use a similar technique,
3698 called <e>slices</e>.
3699 </p>
3700
3701 </body>
3702 </subsection>
3703 </section>
3704 <section>
3705 <title>Designing a Partitioning Scheme</title>
3706 <subsection>
3707 <title>How Many and How Big?</title>
3708 <body>
3709
3710 <p>
3711 The number of partitions is highly dependent on your environment. For instance,
3712 if you have lots of users, you will most likely want to have your
3713 <path>/home</path> separate as it increases security and makes backups easier.
3714 If you are installing Gentoo to perform as a mailserver, your
3715 <path>/var</path> should be separate as all mails are stored inside
3716 <path>/var</path>. A good choice of filesystem will then maximise your
3717 performance. Gameservers will have a separate <path>/opt</path> as most gaming
3718 servers are installed there. The reason is similar for <path>/home</path>:
3719 security and backups. You will definitely want to keep <path>/usr</path> big:
3720 not only will it contain the majority of applications, the Portage tree alone
3721 takes around 500 Mbyte excluding the various sources that are stored in it.
3722 </p>
3723
3724 <p>
3725 As you can see, it very much depends on what you want to achieve. Separate
3726 partitions or volumes have the following advantages:
3727 </p>
3728
3729 <ul>
3730 <li>
3731 You can choose the best performing filesystem for each partition or volume
3732 </li>
3733 <li>
3734 Your entire system cannot run out of free space if one defunct tool is
3735 continuously writing files to a partition or volume
3736 </li>
3737 <li>
3738 If necessary, file system checks are reduced in time, as multiple checks can
3739 be done in parallel (although this advantage is more with multiple disks than
3740 it is with multiple partitions)
3741 </li>
3742 <li>
3743 Security can be enhanced by mounting some partitions or volumes read-only,
3744 nosuid (setuid bits are ignored), noexec (executable bits are ignored) etc.
3745 </li>
3746 </ul>
3747
3748 <p>
3749 However, multiple partitions have one big disadvantage: if not configured
3750 properly, you might result in having a system with lots
3751 of free space on one partition and none on another. There is also a 15-partition
3752 limit for SCSI and SATA.
3753 </p>
3754
3755 </body>
3756 </subsection>
3757 </section>
3758 <section>
3759 <title>Using fdisk on HPPA to Partition your Disk</title>
3760 <body>
3761
3762 <p>
3763 Use <c>fdisk</c> to create the partitions you want:
3764 </p>
3765
3766 <pre caption="Partitioning the disk">
3767 # <i>fdisk /dev/sda</i>
3768 </pre>
3769
3770 <p>
3771 HPPA machines use the PC standard DOS partition tables. To create a new
3772 DOS partition table, simply use the <c>o</c> command.
3773 </p>
3774
3775 <pre caption="Creating a DOS partition table">
3776 # <i>fdisk /dev/sda</i>
3777
3778 Command (m for help): <i>o</i>
3779 Building a new DOS disklabel.
3780 </pre>
3781
3782 <p>
3783 PALO (the HPPA bootloader) needs a special partition to work. You have
3784 to create a partition of at least 16MB at the beginning of your disk.
3785 The partition type must be of type <e>f0</e> (Linux/PA-RISC boot).
3786 </p>
3787
3788 <impo>
3789 If you ignore this and continue without a special PALO partition, your system
3790 will stop loving you and fail to start. Also, if your disk is larger than 2GB,
3791 make sure that the boot partition is in the first 2GB of your disk. PALO is
3792 unable to read a kernel after the 2GB limit.
3793 </impo>
3794
3795 <pre caption="A simple default partition schema">
3796 # <i>cat /etc/fstab</i>
3797 /dev/sda2 /boot ext3 noauto,noatime 1 1
3798 /dev/sda3 none swap sw 0 0
3799 /dev/sda4 / ext3 noatime 0 0
3800
3801 # <i>fdisk /dev/sda</i>
3802
3803 Command (m for help): <i>p</i>
3804
3805 Disk /dev/sda: 4294 MB, 4294816768 bytes
3806 133 heads, 62 sectors/track, 1017 cylinders
3807 Units = cylinders of 8246 * 512 = 4221952 bytes
3808
3809 Device Boot Start End Blocks Id System
3810 /dev/sda1 1 8 32953 f0 Linux/PA-RISC boot
3811 /dev/sda2 9 20 49476 83 Linux
3812 /dev/sda3 21 70 206150 82 Linux swap
3813 /dev/sda4 71 1017 3904481 83 Linux
3814 </pre>
3815
3816 <p>
3817 Now that your partitions are created, you can now continue with <uri
3818 link="#filesystems">Creating Filesystems</uri>.
3819 </p>
3820
3821 </body>
3822 </section>
3823 <section id="filesystems">
3824 <title>Creating Filesystems</title>
3825 <subsection>
3826 <title>Introduction</title>
3827 <body>
3828
3829 <p>
3830 Now that your partitions are created, it is time to place a filesystem on them.
3831 If you don't care about what filesystem to choose and are happy with what we use
3832 as default in this handbook, continue with <uri
3833 link="#filesystems-apply">Applying a Filesystem to a Partition</uri>.
3834 Otherwise read on to learn about the available filesystems...
3835 </p>
3836
3837 </body>
3838 </subsection>
3839 <subsection>
3840 <title>Filesystems?</title>
3841 <body>
3842
3843 <p>
3844 Several filesystems are available. Ext2, ext3, XFS and reiserfs are found stable on
3845
3846
3847
3848 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-kernel.xml
3849
3850 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
3851 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
3852
3853 Index: hb-install-hppa-kernel.xml
3854 ===================================================================
3855 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
3856 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
3857
3858 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
3859 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
3860
3861 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-kernel.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
3862
3863 <sections>
3864
3865 <version>4.3</version>
3866 <date>2005-06-09</date>
3867
3868 <section>
3869 <title>Timezone</title>
3870 <body>
3871
3872 <p>
3873 You first need to select your timezone so that your system knows where it is
3874 located. Look for your timezone in <path>/usr/share/zoneinfo</path>, then make a
3875 symlink to <path>/etc/localtime</path> using <c>ln</c>:
3876 </p>
3877
3878 <pre caption="Setting the timezone information">
3879 # <i>ls /usr/share/zoneinfo</i>
3880 <comment>(Suppose you want to use GMT)</comment>
3881 # <i>ln -sf /usr/share/zoneinfo/GMT /etc/localtime</i>
3882 </pre>
3883
3884 </body>
3885 </section>
3886 <section>
3887 <title>Installing the Sources</title>
3888 <subsection>
3889 <title>Choosing a Kernel</title>
3890 <body>
3891
3892 <p>
3893 The core around which all distributions are built is the Linux kernel. It is the
3894 layer between the user programs and your system hardware. Gentoo provides its
3895 users several possible kernel sources. A full listing with description is
3896 available at the <uri link="/doc/en/gentoo-kernel.xml">Gentoo Kernel
3897 Guide</uri>.
3898 </p>
3899
3900 <p>
3901 For HPPA we have <c>hppa-sources</c>. Default these sources are based on
3902 the 2.6 kernel sources. If you want to install a 2.4 kernel, you will need
3903 to install Gentoo from a working Internet connection as we do not supply those
3904 sources on our Installation CD. Continue by installing the kernel source:
3905 </p>
3906
3907 <pre caption="Installing a kernel source">
3908 # <i>emerge hppa-sources</i>
3909 </pre>
3910
3911 <p>
3912 When you take a look in <path>/usr/src</path> you should see a symlink called
3913 <path>linux</path> pointing to your kernel source:
3914 </p>
3915
3916 <pre caption="Viewing the kernel source symlink">
3917 # <i>ls -l /usr/src/linux</i>
3918 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 12 Oct 13 11:04 /usr/src/linux -&gt; linux-2.6.10_p11
3919 </pre>
3920
3921 <p>
3922 If this isn't the case (i.e. the symlink points to a different kernel source)
3923 change the symlink before you continue:
3924 </p>
3925
3926 <pre caption="Changing the kernel source symlink">
3927 # <i>rm /usr/src/linux</i>
3928 # <i>cd /usr/src</i>
3929 # <i>ln -s linux-2.6.10_p11 linux</i>
3930 </pre>
3931
3932 <p>
3933 Now it is time to configure and compile your kernel source. All architectures
3934 can use <c>genkernel</c> for this, which will build a generic kernel as used
3935 by the Installation CD. We explain the "manual" configuration first though, as
3936 it is the best way to optimize your environment.
3937 </p>
3938
3939 <p>
3940 If you want to manually configure your kernel, continue now with <uri
3941 link="#manual">Default: Manual Configuration</uri>. If you want to use
3942 <c>genkernel</c> you should read <uri link="#genkernel">Alternative: Using
3943 genkernel</uri> instead.
3944 </p>
3945
3946 </body>
3947 </subsection>
3948 </section>
3949 <section id="manual">
3950 <title>Default: Manual Configuration</title>
3951 <subsection>
3952 <title>Introduction</title>
3953 <body>
3954
3955 <p>
3956 Manually configuring a kernel is often seen as the most difficult procedure a
3957 Linux user ever has to perform. Nothing is less true -- after configuring a
3958 couple of kernels you don't even remember that it was difficult ;)
3959 </p>
3960
3961 <p>
3962 However, one thing <e>is</e> true: you must know your system when you start
3963 configuring a kernel manually. Most information can be gathered by emerging
3964 pciutils (<c>emerge pciutils</c>) which contains <c>lspci</c>. You will now
3965 be able to use <c>lspci</c> within the chrooted environment. You may safely
3966 ignore any <e>pcilib</e> warnings (like pcilib: cannot open
3967 /sys/bus/pci/devices) that <c>lspci</c> throws out. Alternatively, you can run
3968 <c>lspci</c> from a <e>non-chrooted</e> environment. The results are the same.
3969 You can also run <c>lsmod</c> to see what kernel modules the Installation CD
3970 uses (it might provide you with a nice hint on what to enable).
3971 </p>
3972
3973 <p>
3974 Now go to your kernel source directory and execute <c>make menuconfig</c>. This
3975 will fire up an ncurses-based configuration menu.
3976 </p>
3977
3978 <pre caption="Invoking menuconfig">
3979 # <i>cd /usr/src/linux</i>
3980 # <i>make menuconfig</i>
3981 </pre>
3982
3983 <p>
3984 You will be greeted with several configuration sections. We'll first list some
3985 options you must activate (otherwise Gentoo will not function, or not function
3986 properly without additional tweaks).
3987 </p>
3988
3989 </body>
3990 </subsection>
3991 <subsection>
3992 <title>Activating Required Options</title>
3993 <body>
3994
3995 <p>
3996 First of all, activate the use of development and experimental code/drivers.
3997 You need this, otherwise some very important code/drivers won't show up:
3998 </p>
3999
4000 <pre caption="Selecting experimental code/drivers, General setup">
4001 Code maturity level options ---&gt;
4002 [*] Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers
4003 General setup --->
4004 [*] Support for hot-pluggable devices
4005 </pre>
4006
4007 <p>
4008 Now go to <c>File Systems</c> and select support for the filesystems you use.
4009 <e>Don't</e> compile them as modules, otherwise your Gentoo system will not be
4010 able to mount your partitions. Also select <c>Virtual memory</c>, <c>/proc
4011 file system</c>, <c>/dev file system</c> + <c>Automatically mount at boot</c>:
4012 </p>
4013
4014 <pre caption="Selecting necessary file systems">
4015 File systems ---&gt;
4016 Pseudo Filesystems ---&gt;
4017 [*] /proc file system support
4018 [*] /dev file system support (OBSOLETE)
4019 [*] Automatically mount at boot
4020 [*] Virtual memory file system support (former shm fs)
4021
4022 <comment>(Select one or more of the following options as needed by your system)</comment>
4023 &lt;*&gt; Reiserfs support
4024 &lt;*&gt; Ext3 journalling file system support
4025 &lt;*&gt; JFS filesystem support
4026 &lt;*&gt; Second extended fs support
4027 &lt;*&gt; XFS filesystem support
4028 </pre>
4029
4030 <p>
4031 If you are using PPPoE to connect to the Internet or you are using a dial-up
4032 modem, you will need the following options in the kernel:
4033 </p>
4034
4035 <pre caption="Selecting PPPoE necessary drivers">
4036 Device Drivers ---&gt;
4037 Networking support ---&gt;
4038 &lt;*&gt; PPP (point-to-point protocol) support
4039 &lt;*&gt; PPP support for async serial ports
4040 &lt;*&gt; PPP support for sync tty ports
4041 </pre>
4042
4043 <p>
4044 The two compression options won't harm but are not definitely needed, neither
4045 does the <c>PPP over Ethernet</c> option, that might only be used by
4046 <c>rp-pppoe</c> when configured to do kernel mode PPPoE.
4047 </p>
4048
4049 <p>
4050 If you require it, don't forget to include support in the kernel for your
4051 ethernet card.
4052 </p>
4053
4054
4055
4056
4057 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-medium.xml
4058
4059 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
4060 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
4061
4062 Index: hb-install-hppa-medium.xml
4063 ===================================================================
4064 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
4065 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
4066
4067 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
4068 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
4069
4070 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-hppa-medium.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
4071
4072 <sections>
4073
4074 <version>4.2</version>
4075 <date>2005-05-24</date>
4076
4077 <section>
4078 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
4079 <subsection>
4080 <title>Introduction</title>
4081 <body>
4082
4083 <p>
4084 Before we start, we first list what hardware requirements you need to
4085 successfully install Gentoo on your box.
4086 </p>
4087
4088 </body>
4089 </subsection>
4090 <subsection>
4091 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
4092 <body>
4093
4094 <p>
4095 A list of supported hardware can be found on the
4096 <uri link="http://www.pateam.org/list.html">PA Team website</uri>.
4097 You may find additional information about your box in the <uri
4098 link="http://hwdb.parisc-linux.org">Parisc-Linux Hardware Database</uri>.
4099 </p>
4100
4101 <table>
4102 <tr>
4103 <th>Memory</th>
4104 <ti>64 MB</ti>
4105 </tr>
4106 <tr>
4107 <th>Diskspace</th>
4108 <ti>1.5 GB (excluding swap space)</ti>
4109 </tr>
4110 <tr>
4111 <th>Swap space</th>
4112 <ti>At least 256 MB</ti>
4113 </tr>
4114 </table>
4115
4116 </body>
4117 </subsection>
4118 </section>
4119 <!-- Copy/paste from hb-install-x86-medium.xml -->
4120 <!-- START -->
4121 <section>
4122 <title>The Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
4123 <subsection>
4124 <title>Introduction</title>
4125 <body>
4126
4127 <p>
4128 Gentoo Linux can be installed using one of three <e>stage</e> tarball files. A
4129 stage file is a tarball (compressed archive) that contains a minimal
4130 environment.
4131 </p>
4132
4133 <ul>
4134 <li>
4135 A stage1 file contains nothing more than a compiler, Portage (Gentoo's
4136 software management system) and a couple of packages on which the
4137 compiler or Portage depends.
4138 </li>
4139 <li>
4140 A stage2 file contains a so-called bootstrapped system, a minimal
4141 environment from which one can start building all other necessary
4142 applications that make a Gentoo environment complete.
4143 </li>
4144 <li>
4145 A stage3 file contains a prebuilt minimal system which is almost fully
4146 deployable. It only lacks a few applications where you, the Gentoo user,
4147 needs to choose which one you want to install.
4148 </li>
4149 </ul>
4150
4151 <p>
4152 We will opt for a stage3 installation throughout this document. If you want to
4153 perform a Gentoo installation using the stage1 or stage2 files, please use the
4154 installation instructions in the <uri
4155 link="/doc/en/handbook/handbook-hppa.xml">Gentoo Handbook</uri>. They do
4156 require a working Internet connection though.
4157 </p>
4158
4159 </body>
4160 </subsection>
4161 <subsection>
4162 <title>Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
4163 <body>
4164
4165 <p>
4166 An Installation CD is a bootable medium which contains a self-sustained Gentoo
4167 environment. It allows you to boot Linux from the CD. During the boot process
4168 your hardware is detected and the appropriate drivers are loaded. The Gentoo
4169 Installation CDs are maintained by Gentoo developers.
4170 </p>
4171
4172 <p>
4173 There currently are two Installation CDs available:
4174 </p>
4175
4176 <ul>
4177 <li>
4178 The Universal Installation CD contains everything you need to install
4179 Gentoo. It provides stage3 files for common architectures, source code
4180 for the extra applications you need to choose from and, of course, the
4181 installation instructions for your architecture.
4182 </li>
4183 <li>
4184 The Minimal Installation CD contains only a minimal environment that allows
4185 you to boot up and configure your network so you can connect to the
4186 Internet. It does not contain any additional files and cannot be used
4187 during the current installation approach.
4188 </li>
4189 </ul>
4190
4191 <p>
4192 Gentoo also provides a Package CD. This is no Installation CD but an additional
4193 resource that you can exploit during the installation of your Gentoo system. It
4194 contains prebuilt packages (the so-called GRP set) that allows you to easily
4195 and quickly install additional applications (such as OpenOffice.org, KDE,
4196 GNOME, ...) immediately after the Gentoo installation and right before you
4197 update your Portage tree.
4198 </p>
4199
4200 <p>
4201 The use of the Package CD is covered later in this document.
4202 </p>
4203
4204 </body>
4205 </subsection>
4206 </section>
4207 <!-- STOP -->
4208 <section>
4209 <title>Download, Burn and Boot the Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
4210 <subsection>
4211 <title>Downloading and Burning the Installation CD</title>
4212 <body>
4213
4214 <p>
4215 You can download the Universal Installation CD (and, if you want to, the
4216 Packages CD as well) from one of our <uri
4217 link="/main/en/mirrors.xml">mirrors</uri>. The Installation CD is located in
4218 the <path>releases/hppa/2005.0/installcd</path> directory;
4219 the Package CD is located in the <path>releases/hppa/2005.0/packagecd</path>
4220 directory.
4221 </p>
4222
4223 <p>
4224 Inside those directories you'll find so-called ISO-files. Those are full CD
4225 images which you can write on a CD-R.
4226 </p>
4227
4228 <p>
4229 After downloading the file, you can verify its integrity to see if it is
4230 corrupted or not:
4231 </p>
4232
4233 <ul>
4234 <li>
4235 You can check its MD5 checksum and compare it with the MD5 checksum we
4236 provide (for instance with the <c>md5sum</c> tool under Linux/Unix or
4237 <uri link="http://www.etree.org/md5com.html">md5sum</uri> for Windows)
4238 </li>
4239 <li>
4240 You can verify the cryptographic signature that we provide. You need to
4241 obtain the public key we use (17072058) before you proceed though.
4242 </li>
4243 </ul>
4244
4245 <p>
4246 To fetch our public key using the GnuPG application, run the following command:
4247 </p>
4248
4249 <pre caption="Obtaining the public key">
4250 $ <i>gpg --keyserver pgp.mit.edu --recv-keys 17072058</i>
4251 </pre>
4252
4253 <p>
4254 Now verify the signature:
4255 </p>
4256
4257 <pre caption="Verify the cryptographic signature">
4258 $ <i>gpg --verify &lt;signature file&gt; &lt;downloaded iso&gt;</i>
4259 </pre>
4260
4261 <p>
4262 To burn the downloaded ISO(s), you have to select raw-burning. How you
4263
4264
4265
4266 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-network.xml
4267
4268 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-network.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
4269 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-network.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
4270
4271 Index: hb-install-network.xml
4272 ===================================================================
4273 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
4274 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
4275
4276 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
4277 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
4278
4279 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-network.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
4280
4281 <sections>
4282
4283 <version>4.1</version>
4284 <date>2005-07-28</date>
4285
4286 <section>
4287 <title>Do you need Networking?</title>
4288 <subsection>
4289 <title>Who can do without?</title>
4290 <body>
4291
4292 <p>
4293 Generally, you don't need a working network connection to install Gentoo using
4294 the Universal Installation CD. However, there are some circumstances where you
4295 do want to have a working Internet connection:
4296 </p>
4297
4298 <ul>
4299 <li>
4300 The stage3 files that are stored in the Universal Installation CD do not
4301 match your architecture and you need to download the correct stage3 file
4302 </li>
4303 <li>
4304 You need to install a specific networking application that will allow you to
4305 connect to the Internet which isn't available on the Universal Installation
4306 CD but is supported by the Installation CD (i.e. you can connect to the
4307 Internet using the Installation CD but the necessary sources are not
4308 available on the Installation CD)
4309 </li>
4310 <li>
4311 You want remote assistance during the installation (using SSH or through
4312 direct conversations using IRC)
4313 </li>
4314 </ul>
4315
4316 </body>
4317 </subsection>
4318 <subsection>
4319 <title>Do I need Networking?</title>
4320 <body>
4321
4322 <p>
4323 To find out if the stage3 file for your architecture is available, take a look
4324 inside <path>/mnt/cdrom/stages</path> and check if one of the available stages
4325 matches your architecture. If not, you can still opt for a stage3 file of an
4326 architecture compatible with yours.
4327 </p>
4328
4329 <p>
4330 If you on the other hand want to use a stage3 file optimized for your
4331 architecture and the stage3 file of your choice is not available, then you will
4332 need networking to download the appropriate stage3 file.
4333 </p>
4334
4335 <p>
4336 So, if you don't need networking, you can skip the rest of this chapter and
4337 continue with <uri link="?part=1&amp;chap=4">Preparing the Disks</uri>.
4338 Otherwise, continue with the networking configuration sections below.
4339 </p>
4340
4341 </body>
4342 </subsection>
4343 </section>
4344 <section>
4345 <title>Automatic Network Detection</title>
4346 <subsection>
4347 <title>Maybe it just works?</title>
4348 <body>
4349
4350 <p>
4351 If your system is plugged into an Ethernet network with a DHCP server, it is
4352 very likely that your networking configuration has already been set up
4353 automatically for you. If so, you should be able to take advantage of the many
4354 included network-aware commands on the Installation CD such as <c>ssh</c>,
4355 <c>scp</c>, <c>ping</c>, <c>irssi</c>, <c>wget</c> and <c>links</c>, among
4356 others.
4357 </p>
4358
4359 <p>
4360 If networking has been configured for you, the <c>/sbin/ifconfig</c> command
4361 should list some network interfaces besides lo, such as eth0:
4362 </p>
4363
4364 <pre caption="/sbin/ifconfig for a working network configuration">
4365 # <i>/sbin/ifconfig</i>
4366 <comment>(...)</comment>
4367 eth0 Link encap:Ethernet HWaddr 00:50:BA:8F:61:7A
4368 inet addr:192.168.0.2 Bcast:192.168.0.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
4369 inet6 addr: fe80::50:ba8f:617a/10 Scope:Link
4370 UP BROADCAST RUNNING MULTICAST MTU:1500 Metric:1
4371 RX packets:1498792 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
4372 TX packets:1284980 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0
4373 collisions:1984 txqueuelen:100
4374 RX bytes:485691215 (463.1 Mb) TX bytes:123951388 (118.2 Mb)
4375 Interrupt:11 Base address:0xe800
4376 </pre>
4377
4378 </body>
4379 </subsection>
4380 <subsection>
4381 <title>Optional: Configure Proxy</title>
4382 <body>
4383
4384 <p>
4385 If you access the Internet through a proxy, you might need to set up proxy
4386 information during the installation. It is very easy to define a proxy: you just
4387 need to define a variable which contains the proxy server information.
4388 </p>
4389
4390 <p>
4391 In most cases, you can just define the variables using the server hostname. As
4392 an example, we assume the proxy is called <e>proxy.gentoo.org</e> and the port
4393 is 8080.
4394 </p>
4395
4396 <pre caption="Defining proxy servers">
4397 <comment>(If the proxy filters HTTP traffic)</comment>
4398 # <i>export http_proxy="http://proxy.gentoo.org:8080"</i>
4399 <comment>(If the proxy filters FTP traffic)</comment>
4400 # <i>export ftp_proxy="ftp://proxy.gentoo.org:8080"</i>
4401 <comment>(If the proxy filters RSYNC traffic)</comment>
4402 # <i>export RSYNC_PROXY="proxy.gentoo.org:8080"</i>
4403 </pre>
4404
4405 <p>
4406 If your proxy requires a username and password, you should use the following
4407 syntax for the variable:
4408 </p>
4409
4410 <pre caption="Adding username/password to the proxy variable">
4411 http://<i>username</i>:<i>password</i>@proxy.gentoo.org:8080
4412 </pre>
4413
4414 </body>
4415 </subsection>
4416 <subsection>
4417 <title>Testing the Network</title>
4418 <body>
4419
4420 <p>
4421 You may want to try pinging your ISP's DNS server (found in
4422 <path>/etc/resolv.conf</path>) and a Web site of choice, just to make sure
4423 that your packets are reaching the net, DNS name resolution is working
4424 correctly, etc..
4425 </p>
4426
4427 <pre caption="Further network testing">
4428 # <i>ping -c 3 www.yahoo.com</i>
4429 </pre>
4430
4431 <p>
4432 Are you able to use your network? If so, you can skip the rest of this
4433 section and continue with <uri link="?part=1&amp;chap=4">Preparing the
4434 Disks</uri>. If not, bad luck, you'll have to work on it a bit more.
4435 </p>
4436
4437 </body>
4438 </subsection>
4439 </section>
4440 <section>
4441 <title>Automatic Network Configuration</title>
4442 <subsection>
4443 <body>
4444
4445 <p>
4446 If the network doesn't work immediately, some installation media allow you to
4447 use <c>net-setup</c> (for regular or wireless networks), <c>adsl-setup</c>
4448 (for ADSL-users) or <c>pptp</c> (for PPTP-users - only available on x86).
4449 </p>
4450
4451 <p>
4452 If your installation medium does not contain any of these tools or your network
4453 doesn't function yet, continue with <uri link="#doc_chap4">Manual Network
4454 Configuration</uri>.
4455 </p>
4456
4457 <ul>
4458 <li>
4459 Regular Ethernet users should continue with <uri
4460 link="#net-setup">Default: Using net-setup</uri>
4461 </li>
4462 <li>
4463 ADSL users should continue with <uri link="#rp-pppoe">Alternative:
4464 Using RP-PPPoE</uri>
4465 </li>
4466 <li>
4467 PPTP users should continue with <uri link="#pptp">Alternative:
4468 Using PPTP</uri> (x86 only)
4469 </li>
4470 </ul>
4471
4472
4473
4474
4475 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-next.xml
4476
4477 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-next.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
4478 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-next.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
4479
4480 Index: hb-install-next.xml
4481 ===================================================================
4482 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
4483 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
4484
4485 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
4486 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
4487
4488 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-next.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
4489
4490 <sections>
4491
4492 <version>4.2</version>
4493 <date>2005-06-09</date>
4494
4495 <section>
4496 <title>Documentation</title>
4497 <subsection>
4498 <body>
4499
4500 <p>
4501 Congratulations! You now have a working Gentoo system. But where to go from
4502 here? What are your options now? What to explore first? Gentoo provides its
4503 users with lots of possibilities, and therefore lots of documented (and less
4504 documented) features.
4505 </p>
4506
4507 <p>
4508 You should definitely take a look at the next part of the Gentoo Handbook
4509 entitled <uri link="?part=2&amp;chap=0">Working with Gentoo</uri> which explains
4510 how to keep your software up to date, how to install more software, what USE
4511 flags are, how the Gentoo Init system works, etc.
4512 </p>
4513
4514 <p>
4515 If you are interested in optimizing your system for desktop-use, or you want to
4516 learn how to configure your system to be a full working desktop system, consult
4517 our extensive <uri link="/doc/en/index.xml?catid=desktop">Gentoo Desktop
4518 Documentation Resources</uri>.
4519 </p>
4520
4521 <p>
4522 We also have a <uri link="/doc/en/security/">Gentoo Security Handbook</uri>
4523 which is worth reading.
4524 </p>
4525
4526 <p>
4527 For a full listing of all our available documentation check out our <uri
4528 link="/doc/en/index.xml">Documentation Resources</uri> page.
4529 </p>
4530
4531 </body>
4532 </subsection>
4533 </section>
4534 <section>
4535 <title>Gentoo Online</title>
4536 <body>
4537
4538 <p>
4539 You are of course always welcome on our <uri
4540 link="http://forums.gentoo.org">Gentoo Forums</uri> or on one of our many
4541 <uri link="/main/en/irc.xml">Gentoo IRC channels</uri>.
4542 </p>
4543
4544 <p>
4545 We also have several <uri
4546 link="/main/en/lists.xml">mailinglists</uri> open to all
4547 our users. Information on how to join is contained in that page.
4548 </p>
4549
4550 <p>
4551 We'll shut up now and let you enjoy your installation :)
4552 </p>
4553
4554 </body>
4555 </section>
4556 <section>
4557 <title>Gentoo Changes since 2005.0</title>
4558 <subsection>
4559 <title>Changes?</title>
4560 <body>
4561
4562 <p>
4563 Gentoo is a fast-moving target. The following sections describe important
4564 changes that affect a Gentoo installation. We only list those that have anything
4565 in common with the installation, not with package changes that did not occur
4566 during the installation.
4567 </p>
4568
4569 <p>
4570 The following changes need to happen right after having updated your system (and
4571 before rebooting):
4572 </p>
4573
4574 <ul>
4575 <li>
4576 The <c>baselayout</c> package has received major updates, including on the
4577 <uri link="?part=4">Gentoo Network Configuration</uri> aspect. The changes
4578 include a new syntax for the <path>/etc/conf.d/net</path> file although the
4579 old syntax is still supported. You are advised to change to the new one in
4580 time.
4581 </li>
4582 </ul>
4583
4584 </body>
4585 </subsection>
4586 </section>
4587 </sections>
4588
4589
4590
4591 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-bootloader.xml
4592
4593 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
4594 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
4595
4596 Index: hb-install-ppc-bootloader.xml
4597 ===================================================================
4598 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
4599 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
4600
4601 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
4602 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
4603
4604 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-bootloader.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
4605
4606 <sections>
4607
4608 <version>4.00</version>
4609 <date>2005-03-19</date>
4610
4611 <section>
4612 <title>Making your Choice</title>
4613 <subsection>
4614 <title>Introduction</title>
4615 <body>
4616
4617 <p>
4618 Now that your kernel is configured and compiled and the necessary system
4619 configuration files are filled in correctly, it is time to install a
4620 program that will fire up your kernel when you start the system. Such a
4621 program is called a <e>bootloader</e>. But before you start, consider
4622 your options...
4623 </p>
4624
4625 <p>
4626 Several bootloaders exist for Linux/PPC. We have <uri link="#yaboot">yaboot</uri>
4627 (for NewWorld Apple and IBM machines) and <uri link="#bootx">BootX</uri> (for
4628 OldWorld Apple and IBM machines). The Pegasos does not require a bootloader, but
4629 we included the <uri link="#bootcreator">BootCreator</uri> for creating a
4630 SmartFirmware bootmenu.
4631 </p>
4632
4633 </body>
4634 </subsection>
4635 </section>
4636 <section id="yaboot">
4637 <title>Default: Using yaboot</title>
4638 <subsection>
4639 <title>Introduction</title>
4640 <body>
4641
4642 <impo>
4643 yaboot can only be used on NewWorld Apple and IBM systems!
4644 </impo>
4645
4646 <p>
4647 First we have to create the <path>/dev</path> files in our new home, which is
4648 needed during the bootloader installation. This could be done by "bind"-mapping
4649 the <path>/dev</path>-filesystem from the Installation CD:
4650 </p>
4651
4652 <pre caption="Bind-mounting the /dev-filesystem">
4653 # <i>exit </i> # this will exit the chroot
4654 # <i>mount -o bind /dev /mnt/gentoo/dev</i>
4655 # <i>chroot /mnt/gentoo /bin/bash</i>
4656 # <i>/usr/sbin/env-update &amp;&amp; source /etc/profile </i>
4657 </pre>
4658
4659 <p>
4660 There are two ways to configure yaboot for your system. You can use the
4661 included <c>yabootconfig</c> to automatically set up yaboot. If
4662 for some reason you do not want to run <c>yabootconfig</c> to
4663 automatically set up <path>/etc/yaboot.conf</path> or you are installing Gentoo
4664 on a G5 (on which <c>yabootconfig</c> does not always work), you can just edit
4665 the sample file already installed on your system.
4666 </p>
4667
4668 <ul>
4669 <li><uri link="#yabootconfig">Default: Using yabootconfig</uri></li>
4670 <li>
4671 <uri link="#manual_yaboot">Alternative: Manual yaboot Configuration</uri>
4672 </li>
4673 </ul>
4674
4675 </body>
4676 </subsection>
4677 <subsection id="yabootconfig">
4678 <title>Default: Using yabootconfig</title>
4679 <body>
4680
4681 <p>
4682 <c>yabootconfig</c> will auto-detect the partitions on your machine and will
4683 set up dual and triple boot combinations with Linux, Mac OS, and Mac OS X.
4684 </p>
4685
4686 <p>
4687 To use <c>yabootconfig</c>, your drive must have an Apple_Bootstrap partition,
4688 and <path>/etc/fstab</path> must be configured with your Linux partitions. Both
4689 of these should have been done already in the steps above. To start, ensure that
4690 you have the latest <c>yaboot</c> installed.
4691 </p>
4692
4693 <pre caption = "Installing yaboot with GRP">
4694 # <i>emerge --usepkg --update yaboot</i>
4695 </pre>
4696
4697 <p>
4698 Now exit the chroot and run <c>yabootconfig --chroot /mnt/gentoo</c>. The
4699 program will run and it will confirm the location of the bootstrap partition.
4700 Type <c>Y</c> if it is correct. If not, double check <path>/etc/fstab</path>.
4701 yabootconfig will then scan your system setup, create
4702 <path>/etc/yaboot.conf</path> and run <c>mkofboot</c> for you. <c>mkofboot</c>
4703 is used to format the Apple_Bootstrap partition, and install the yaboot
4704 configuration file into it. After this enter the chroot again.
4705 </p>
4706 <pre caption="enter chroot">
4707 # <i>chroot /mnt/gentoo /bin/bash</i>
4708 # <i>/usr/sbin/env-update &amp;&amp; source /etc/profile</i>
4709 </pre>
4710
4711 <p>
4712 You might want to verify the contents of <path>/etc/yaboot.conf</path>. If you
4713 make changes to <path>/etc/yaboot.conf</path> (like setting the default/boot
4714 OS), make sure to rerun <c>ybin -v</c> to apply changes to the Apple_Bootstrap
4715 partition.
4716 </p>
4717
4718 <p>
4719 Now continue with <uri link="#reboot">Rebooting the System</uri>.
4720 </p>
4721
4722 </body>
4723 </subsection>
4724 <subsection id="manual_yaboot">
4725 <title>Alternative: Manual yaboot Configuration</title>
4726 <body>
4727
4728 <p>
4729 First make sure you have the latest <c>yaboot</c> installed on your
4730 system:
4731 </p>
4732
4733 <pre caption = "Installing yaboot">
4734 # <i>emerge --usepkg --update yaboot</i>
4735 </pre>
4736
4737 <p>
4738 Below you find a completed <path>yaboot.conf</path> file. Alter it at
4739 will. G5 users should be aware that their disks are Serial ATA disks which are
4740 seen as SCSI disks by the Linux kernel (so substitute <path>/dev/hda</path> with
4741 <path>/dev/sda</path>).
4742 </p>
4743
4744 <pre caption = "/etc/yaboot.conf">
4745 <comment>## /etc/yaboot.conf
4746 ##
4747 ## run: "man yaboot.conf" for details. Do not make changes until you have!!
4748 ## see also: /usr/share/doc/yaboot/examples for example configurations.
4749 ##
4750 ## For a dual-boot menu, add one or more of:
4751 ## bsd=/dev/hdaX, macos=/dev/hdaY, macosx=/dev/hdaZ
4752
4753 ## our bootstrap partition:</comment>
4754
4755 boot=/dev/hda2
4756
4757 <comment>## ofboot is the openfirmware way to specify the bootstrap partition.
4758 ## If this isn't defined, yaboot fails on the G5 and some G4s (unless
4759 ## you pass the necessary arguments to the mkofboot/ybin program).
4760 ## hd:X means /dev/sdaX (or /dev/hdaX).
4761 ##
4762 ## G5 users should uncomment this line!!
4763
4764 #ofboot=hd:2
4765
4766 ## hd: is open firmware speak for hda</comment>
4767 device=hd:
4768
4769 delay=5
4770 defaultos=macosx
4771 timeout=30
4772 install=/usr/lib/yaboot/yaboot
4773 magicboot=/usr/lib/yaboot/ofboot
4774
4775 <comment>#################
4776 ## This section can be duplicated if you have more than one kernel or set of
4777 ## boot options - replace 2.6.9 with your kernel-version
4778 #################</comment>
4779 image=/boot/kernel-2.6.9
4780 label=Linux
4781 root=/dev/hda3
4782 partition=3
4783 sysmap=/boot/System.map-2.6.9
4784 read-only
4785 <comment>##################
4786
4787 ## G5 users and some G4 users should set
4788 ## macos=hd:13
4789 ## macosx=hd:12
4790 ## instead of the example values.</comment>
4791 macos=/dev/hda13
4792 macosx=/dev/hda12
4793 enablecdboot
4794 enableofboot
4795 </pre>
4796
4797
4798
4799
4800 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-disk.xml
4801
4802 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
4803 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
4804
4805 Index: hb-install-ppc-disk.xml
4806 ===================================================================
4807 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
4808 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
4809
4810 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
4811 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.5 -->
4812
4813 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-disk.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
4814
4815 <sections>
4816
4817 <version>4.2</version>
4818 <date>2005-08-02</date>
4819
4820 <section>
4821 <title>Introduction to Block Devices</title>
4822 <subsection>
4823 <title>Block Devices</title>
4824 <body>
4825
4826 <p>
4827 We'll take a good look at disk-oriented aspects of Gentoo Linux
4828 and Linux in general, including Linux filesystems, partitions and block devices.
4829 Then, once you're familiar with the ins and outs of disks and filesystems,
4830 you'll be guided through the process of setting up partitions and filesystems
4831 for your Gentoo Linux installation.
4832 </p>
4833
4834 <p>
4835 To begin, we'll introduce <e>block devices</e>. The most famous block device is
4836 probably the one that represents the first IDE drive in a Linux system, namely
4837 <path>/dev/hda</path>. If your system uses SCSI or SATA drives, then your first
4838 hard drive would be <path>/dev/sda</path>.
4839 </p>
4840
4841 <p>
4842 The block devices above represent an abstract interface to the disk. User
4843 programs can use these block devices to interact with your disk without worrying
4844 about whether your drives are IDE, SCSI or something else. The program can
4845 simply address the storage on the disk as a bunch of contiguous,
4846 randomly-accessible 512-byte blocks.
4847 </p>
4848
4849 </body>
4850 </subsection>
4851 <subsection>
4852 <title>Partitions and Slices</title>
4853 <body>
4854
4855 <p>
4856 Although it is theoretically possible to use a full disk to house your Linux
4857 system, this is almost never done in practice. Instead, full disk block devices
4858 are split up in smaller, more manageable block devices. On most systems,
4859 these are called <e>partitions</e>. Other architectures use a similar technique,
4860 called <e>slices</e>.
4861 </p>
4862
4863 </body>
4864 </subsection>
4865 </section>
4866 <section>
4867 <title>Designing a Partitioning Scheme</title>
4868 <subsection>
4869 <title>Default Partitioning Scheme</title>
4870 <body>
4871
4872 <p>
4873 If you are not interested in drawing up a partitioning scheme for your system,
4874 you can use the partitioning scheme we use throughout this book:
4875 </p>
4876
4877 <table>
4878 <tr>
4879 <th>Partition NewWorld</th>
4880 <th>Partition OldWorld</th>
4881 <th>Partition Pegasos</th>
4882 <th>Partition RS/6000</th>
4883 <th>Filesystem</th>
4884 <th>Size</th>
4885 <th>Description</th>
4886 </tr>
4887 <tr>
4888 <ti><path>/dev/hda1</path></ti>
4889 <ti><path>/dev/hda1</path></ti>
4890 <ti>(Not applicable)</ti>
4891 <ti>(Not applicable)</ti>
4892 <ti>(Partition Map)</ti>
4893 <ti>32k</ti>
4894 <ti>Apple_partition_map</ti>
4895 </tr>
4896 <tr>
4897 <ti><path>/dev/hda2</path></ti>
4898 <ti>(Not needed)</ti>
4899 <ti>(Not applicable)</ti>
4900 <ti>(Not applicable)</ti>
4901 <ti>(bootstrap)</ti>
4902 <ti>800k</ti>
4903 <ti>Apple_Bootstrap</ti>
4904 </tr>
4905 <tr>
4906 <ti>(Not applicable</ti>
4907 <ti>(Not applicable)</ti>
4908 <ti>(Not applicable)</ti>
4909 <ti><path>/dev/sda1</path></ti>
4910 <ti>(PReP Boot)</ti>
4911 <ti>800k</ti>
4912 <ti>Type 0x41</ti>
4913 </tr>
4914 <tr>
4915 <ti>(Not needed)</ti>
4916 <ti>(Not needed)</ti>
4917 <ti><path>/dev/hda1</path></ti>
4918 <ti>(Not needed)</ti>
4919 <ti>ext2</ti>
4920 <ti>32MB</ti>
4921 <ti>Boot partition</ti>
4922 </tr>
4923 <tr>
4924 <ti><path>/dev/hda3</path></ti>
4925 <ti><path>/dev/hda2</path></ti>
4926 <ti><path>/dev/hda2</path></ti>
4927 <ti><path>/dev/sda2</path></ti>
4928 <ti>(swap)</ti>
4929 <ti>512M</ti>
4930 <ti>Swap partition, Type 0x82</ti>
4931 </tr>
4932 <tr>
4933 <ti><path>/dev/hda4</path></ti>
4934 <ti><path>/dev/hda3</path></ti>
4935 <ti><path>/dev/hda3</path></ti>
4936 <ti><path>/dev/sda3</path></ti>
4937 <ti>ext3, xfs</ti>
4938 <ti>Rest of the disk</ti>
4939 <ti>Root partition, Type 0x83</ti>
4940 </tr>
4941 </table>
4942
4943 <note>
4944 There are some partitions named like this: <path>Apple_Driver43,
4945 Apple_Driver_ATA, Apple_FWDriver, Apple_Driver_IOKit, Apple_Patches</path>. If
4946 you are not planning to use MacOS 9 you can delete them, because MacOS X and
4947 Linux don't need them. You might have to use <c>parted</c> in order to delete
4948 them, as mac-fdisk can't delete them yet.
4949 </note>
4950
4951 <warn>
4952 <c>parted</c> is able to resize partitions. On the Installation CD there
4953 are patches included to resize HFS+ filesystem. Unfortunately it is not
4954 possible to resize HFS+ journaled filesystems, even if the journaling has been
4955 switchedoff in Mac OS X. Everything you do with resizing in parted you do it
4956 on your own risk! Be sure to have a backup of your data!
4957 </warn>
4958
4959 <p>
4960 If you are interested in knowing how big a partition should be, or even how many
4961 partitions you need, read on. Otherwise continue now with <uri
4962 link="#fdisk">Default: Using mac-fdisk (Apple/IBM) to Partition your Disk</uri>
4963 or <uri link="#parted">Alternative: Using parted (especially Pegasos) to
4964 Partition your Disk</uri>.
4965 </p>
4966
4967 </body>
4968 </subsection>
4969 <subsection>
4970 <title>How Many and How Big?</title>
4971 <body>
4972
4973 <p>
4974 The number of partitions is highly dependent on your environment. For instance,
4975 if you have lots of users, you will most likely want to have your
4976 <path>/home</path> separate as it increases security and makes backups easier.
4977 If you are installing Gentoo to perform as a mailserver, your <path>/var</path>
4978 should be separate as all mails are stored inside <path>/var</path>. A good
4979 choice of filesystem will then maximise your performance. Gameservers will have
4980 a separate <path>/opt</path> as most gaming servers are installed there. The
4981 reason is similar for <path>/home</path>: security and backups. You will
4982 definitely want to keep <path>/usr</path> big: not only will it contain the
4983 majority of applications, the Portage tree alone takes around 500 Mbyte
4984 excluding the various sources that are stored in it.
4985 </p>
4986
4987 <p>
4988 As you can see, it very much depends on what you want to achieve. Separate
4989 partitions or volumes have the following advantages:
4990 </p>
4991
4992 <ul>
4993 <li>
4994 You can choose the best performing filesystem for each partition or volume
4995 </li>
4996 <li>
4997 Your entire system cannot run out of free space if one defunct tool is
4998 continuously writing files to a partition or volume
4999 </li>
5000 <li>
5001 If necessary, file system checks are reduced in time, as multiple checks can
5002 be done in parallel (although this advantage is more with multiple disks than
5003 it is with multiple partitions)
5004 </li>
5005 <li>
5006
5007
5008
5009 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-kernel.xml
5010
5011 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
5012 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
5013
5014 Index: hb-install-ppc-kernel.xml
5015 ===================================================================
5016 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
5017 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
5018
5019 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
5020 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
5021
5022 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-kernel.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
5023
5024 <sections>
5025
5026 <version>4.9</version>
5027 <date>2005-07-04</date>
5028
5029 <section>
5030 <title>Timezone</title>
5031 <body>
5032
5033 <p>
5034 You first need to select your timezone so that your system knows where it is
5035 located. Look for your timezone in <path>/usr/share/zoneinfo</path>, then make a
5036 symlink to <path>/etc/localtime</path> using <c>ln</c>:
5037 </p>
5038
5039 <pre caption="Setting the timezone information">
5040 # <i>ls /usr/share/zoneinfo</i>
5041 <comment>(Suppose you want to use GMT)</comment>
5042 # <i>ln -sf /usr/share/zoneinfo/GMT /etc/localtime</i>
5043 </pre>
5044
5045 </body>
5046 </section>
5047 <section>
5048 <title>Installing the Sources</title>
5049 <subsection>
5050 <title>Choosing a Kernel</title>
5051 <body>
5052
5053 <p>
5054 The core around which all distributions are built is the Linux kernel. It is the
5055 layer between the user programs and your system hardware. Gentoo provides its
5056 users several possible kernel sources. A full listing with description is
5057 available at the <uri link="/doc/en/gentoo-kernel.xml">Gentoo Kernel
5058 Guide</uri>.
5059 </p>
5060
5061 <p>
5062 For PPC you can choose between <c>vanilla-sources</c> and
5063 <c>gentoo-sources</c> (both 2.6 kernels). The latter is available when you
5064 perform a networkless installation. Beside those there is a special
5065 kernel-2.6-patchset for the Pegasos: <c>pegasos-sources</c>. So let's
5066 continue with <c>emerge</c>'ing the kernel sources:
5067 </p>
5068
5069 <pre caption="Installing a kernel source">
5070 # <i>emerge gentoo-sources</i>
5071 </pre>
5072
5073 <note>
5074 The PowerPC sources are based on a 2.6.10-kernel with security patches from
5075 2.6.11 backported. As the time of the release the 2.6.11 kernel produced
5076 several problems on different PowerPC machines.
5077 </note>
5078
5079 <p>
5080 When you take a look in <path>/usr/src</path> you should see a symlink called
5081 <path>linux</path> pointing to your kernel source. We will assume the kernel
5082 source installed is <c>gentoo-sources-2.6.10-r8</c>:
5083 </p>
5084
5085 <pre caption="Viewing the kernel source symlink">
5086 # <i>ls -l /usr/src/linux</i>
5087 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 22 Mar 18 16:23 /usr/src/linux -&gt; linux-2.6.10-gentoo-r8
5088 </pre>
5089
5090 <p>
5091 If the symlink doesn't point to the kernel source of your choice (note that
5092 <c>linux-2.6.10-gentoo-r8</c> is merely an example) you should change it to the
5093 right kernel:
5094 </p>
5095
5096 <pre caption="Changing the kernel source symlink">
5097 # <i>rm /usr/src/linux</i>
5098 # <i>cd /usr/src</i>
5099 # <i>ln -s linux-2.6.10-gentoo-r8 linux</i>
5100 </pre>
5101
5102 <p>
5103 Now it is time to configure and compile your kernel source. You
5104 can use <c>genkernel</c> for this, which will build a generic kernel as used
5105 by the Installation CD. We explain the "manual" configuration first though, as
5106 it is the best way to optimize your environment.
5107 </p>
5108
5109 <p>
5110 If you want to manually configure your kernel, continue now with <uri
5111 link="#manual">Default: Manual Configuration</uri>. If you want to use
5112 <c>genkernel</c> you should read <uri link="#genkernel">Alternative: Using
5113 genkernel</uri> instead.
5114 </p>
5115
5116 </body>
5117 </subsection>
5118 </section>
5119 <section id="manual">
5120 <title>Default: Manual Configuration</title>
5121 <subsection>
5122 <title>Introduction</title>
5123 <body>
5124
5125 <p>
5126 Manually configuring a kernel is often seen as the most difficult procedure a
5127 Linux user ever has to perform. Nothing is less true -- after configuring a
5128 couple of kernels you don't even remember that it was difficult ;)
5129 </p>
5130
5131 <p>
5132 However, one thing <e>is</e> true: you must know your system when you start
5133 configuring a kernel manually. Most information can be gathered by emerging
5134 pciutils (<c>emerge pciutils</c>) which contains <c>lspci</c>. You will now
5135 be able to use <c>lspci</c> within the chrooted environment. You may safely
5136 ignore any <e>pcilib</e> warnings (like pcilib: cannot open
5137 /sys/bus/pci/devices) that <c>lspci</c> throws out. Alternatively, you can run
5138 <c>lspci</c> from a <e>non-chrooted</e> environment. The results are the same.
5139 You can also run <c>lsmod</c> to see what kernel modules the Installation CD
5140 uses (it might provide you with a nice hint on what to enable).
5141 </p>
5142
5143 <p>
5144 Now go to your kernel source directory and execute <c>make menuconfig</c>. This
5145 will fire up an ncurses-based configuration menu.
5146 </p>
5147
5148 <pre caption="Invoking menuconfig">
5149 # <i>cd /usr/src/linux</i>
5150 # <i>make menuconfig</i>
5151 </pre>
5152
5153 <p>
5154 You will be greeted with several configuration sections. We'll first list some
5155 options you must activate (otherwise Gentoo will not function, or not function
5156 properly without additional tweaks).
5157 </p>
5158
5159 </body>
5160 </subsection>
5161 <subsection>
5162 <title>Activating Required Options</title>
5163 <body>
5164
5165 <p>
5166 First of all, activate the use of development and experimental code/drivers.
5167 You need this, otherwise some very important code/drivers won't show up:
5168 </p>
5169
5170 <pre caption="Selecting experimental code/drivers, General setup">
5171 Code maturity level options ---&gt;
5172 [*] Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers
5173 General setup --->
5174 [*] Support for hot-pluggable devices
5175 </pre>
5176
5177 <p>
5178 Now go to <c>File Systems</c> and select support for the filesystems you use.
5179 <e>Don't</e> compile them as modules, otherwise your Gentoo system will not be
5180 able to mount your partitions. Also select <c>/proc file system</c> and
5181 <c>Virtual memory</c>. Do <e>not</e> select the <c>/dev file system</c>.
5182 </p>
5183
5184 <pre caption="Selecting necessary file systems">
5185 File systems ---&gt;
5186 Pseudo Filesystems ---&gt;
5187 [*] /proc file system support
5188 [ ] /dev file system support (OBSOLETE)
5189 [*] Virtual memory file system support (former shm fs)
5190
5191 <comment>(Select one or more of the following options as needed by your system)</comment>
5192 &lt;*&gt; Reiserfs support
5193 &lt;*&gt; Ext3 journalling file system support
5194 &lt;*&gt; Second extended fs support
5195 &lt;*&gt; XFS filesystem support
5196 </pre>
5197
5198 <p>
5199 If you are using PPPoE to connect to the Internet or you are using a dial-up
5200 modem, you will need the following options in the kernel:
5201 </p>
5202
5203 <pre caption="Selecting PPPoE necessary drivers">
5204 Device Drivers ---&gt;
5205 Networking support ---&gt;
5206 &lt;*&gt; PPP (point-to-point protocol) support
5207 &lt;*&gt; PPP support for async serial ports
5208 &lt;*&gt; PPP support for sync tty ports
5209 </pre>
5210
5211 <p>
5212 The two compression options won't harm but are not definitely needed, neither
5213 does the <c>PPP over Ethernet</c> option, that might only be used by
5214 <c>rp-pppoe</c> when configured to do kernel mode PPPoE.
5215
5216
5217
5218 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-medium.xml
5219
5220 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
5221 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
5222
5223 Index: hb-install-ppc-medium.xml
5224 ===================================================================
5225 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
5226 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
5227
5228 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
5229 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
5230
5231 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-ppc-medium.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
5232
5233 <sections>
5234
5235 <version>4.01</version>
5236 <date>2005-05-06</date>
5237
5238 <section>
5239 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
5240 <subsection>
5241 <title>Introduction</title>
5242 <body>
5243
5244 <p>
5245 Before we start, we first list what hardware requirements you need to
5246 successfully install Gentoo on your box.
5247 </p>
5248
5249 </body>
5250 </subsection>
5251 <subsection>
5252 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
5253 <body>
5254
5255 <table>
5256 <tr>
5257 <th>NewWorld machines</th>
5258 <ti>
5259 Power/PowerPC microprocessors (G3, G4, G5) such as iMac, eMac, iBook
5260 PowerBook, Xserver, PowerMac, Genesi's Pegasos II
5261 </ti>
5262 </tr>
5263 <tr>
5264 <th>OldWorld machines</th>
5265 <ti>
5266 Limited support for IBM (RS/6000, iSeries, pSeries) and Amiga systems
5267 </ti>
5268 </tr>
5269 <tr>
5270 <th>Memory</th>
5271 <ti>At least 64 MB</ti>
5272 </tr>
5273 <tr>
5274 <th>Diskspace</th>
5275 <ti>1.5 GB (excluding swap space)</ti>
5276 </tr>
5277 <tr>
5278 <th>Swap space</th>
5279 <ti>At least 256 MB</ti>
5280 </tr>
5281 </table>
5282
5283 <p>
5284 Be sure to read up on the <uri link="/doc/en/gentoo-ppc-faq.xml">Gentoo
5285 PPC FAQ</uri> before you begin.
5286 </p>
5287
5288 </body>
5289 </subsection>
5290 </section>
5291 <!-- Copy/paste of hb-install-x86-medium.xml, with s/x86/ppc/ -->
5292 <!-- START -->
5293 <section>
5294 <title>The Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
5295 <subsection>
5296 <title>Introduction</title>
5297 <body>
5298
5299 <p>
5300 Gentoo Linux can be installed using one of three <e>stage</e> tarball files. A
5301 stage file is a tarball (compressed archive) that contains a minimal
5302 environment.
5303 </p>
5304
5305 <ul>
5306 <li>
5307 A stage1 file contains nothing more than a compiler, Portage (Gentoo's
5308 software management system) and a couple of packages on which the
5309 compiler or Portage depends.
5310 </li>
5311 <li>
5312 A stage2 file contains a so-called bootstrapped system, a minimal
5313 environment from which one can start building all other necessary
5314 applications that make a Gentoo environment complete.
5315 </li>
5316 <li>
5317 A stage3 file contains a prebuilt minimal system which is almost fully
5318 deployable. It only lacks a few applications where you, the Gentoo user,
5319 needs to choose which one you want to install.
5320 </li>
5321 </ul>
5322
5323 <p>
5324 We will opt for a stage3 installation throughout this document. If you want to
5325 perform a Gentoo installation using the stage1 or stage2 files, please use the
5326 installation instructions in the <uri
5327 link="/doc/en/handbook/handbook-ppc.xml">Gentoo Handbook</uri>. They do
5328 require a working Internet connection though.
5329 </p>
5330
5331 </body>
5332 </subsection>
5333 <subsection>
5334 <title>Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
5335 <body>
5336
5337 <p>
5338 An Installation CD is a bootable medium which contains a self-sustained Gentoo
5339 environment. It allows you to boot Linux from the CD. During the boot process
5340 your hardware is detected and the appropriate drivers are loaded. The Gentoo
5341 Installation CDs are maintained by Gentoo developers.
5342 </p>
5343
5344 <p>
5345 There currently are two Installation CDs available:
5346 </p>
5347
5348 <ul>
5349 <li>
5350 The Universal Installation CD contains everything you need to install
5351 Gentoo. It provides stage3 files for common architectures, source code
5352 for the extra applications you need to choose from and, of course, the
5353 installation instructions for your architecture.
5354 </li>
5355 <li>
5356 The Minimal Installation CD contains only a minimal environment that allows
5357 you to boot up and configure your network so you can connect to the
5358 Internet. It does not contain any additional files and cannot be used
5359 during the current installation approach.
5360 </li>
5361 </ul>
5362
5363 <p>
5364 Gentoo also provides a Package CD. This is no Installation CD but an additional
5365 resource that you can exploit during the installation of your Gentoo system. It
5366 contains prebuilt packages (the so-called GRP set) that allows you to easily
5367 and quickly install additional applications (such as OpenOffice.org, KDE,
5368 GNOME, ...) immediately after the Gentoo installation and right before you
5369 update your Portage tree.
5370 </p>
5371
5372 <p>
5373 The use of the Package CD is covered later in this document.
5374 </p>
5375
5376 </body>
5377 </subsection>
5378 </section>
5379 <!-- STOP -->
5380 <section>
5381 <title>Download, Burn and Boot the Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
5382 <subsection>
5383 <title>Downloading and Burning the Installation CD</title>
5384 <body>
5385
5386 <p>
5387 You can download the Universal Installation CD (and, if you want to, the
5388 Packages CD as well) from one of our <uri
5389 link="/main/en/mirrors.xml">mirrors</uri>. The Installation CDs are located
5390 in the <path>releases/ppc/2005.0/installcd</path> directory;
5391 the Package CDs are located in the <path>releases/ppc/2005.0/packagecd</path>
5392 directory.
5393 </p>
5394
5395 <p>
5396 Inside those directories you'll find so-called ISO-files. Those are full CD
5397 images which you can write on a CD-R.
5398 </p>
5399
5400 <p>
5401 After downloading the file, you can verify its integrity to see if it is
5402 corrupted or not:
5403 </p>
5404
5405 <ul>
5406 <li>
5407 You can check its MD5 checksum and compare it with the MD5 checksum we
5408 provide (for instance with the <c>md5sum</c> tool under Linux/Unix or
5409 <uri link="http://www.etree.org/md5com.html">md5sum</uri> for Windows). How
5410 to verify MD5 checksums with Mac OS X is described in the <uri
5411 link="/doc/en/gentoo-ppc-faq.xml#doc_chap1">Gentoo PPC FAQ</uri>.
5412 </li>
5413 <li>
5414 You can verify the cryptographic signature that we provide. You need to
5415 obtain the public key we use (0x17072058) before you proceed though.
5416 </li>
5417 </ul>
5418
5419 <p>
5420 To fetch our public key using the GnuPG application, run the following command:
5421 </p>
5422
5423 <pre caption="Obtaining the public key">
5424
5425
5426
5427 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-bootloader.xml
5428
5429 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
5430 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
5431
5432 Index: hb-install-sparc-bootloader.xml
5433 ===================================================================
5434 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
5435 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
5436
5437 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
5438 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
5439
5440 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-bootloader.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
5441
5442 <sections>
5443
5444 <version>4.00</version>
5445 <date>2005-01-22</date>
5446
5447 <section>
5448 <title>Making your Choice</title>
5449 <subsection>
5450 <title>Introduction</title>
5451 <body>
5452
5453 <p>
5454 Now that your kernel is configured and compiled and the necessary system
5455 configuration files are filled in correctly, it is time to install a
5456 program that will fire up your kernel when you start the system. Such a
5457 program is called a <e>bootloader</e>.
5458 </p>
5459
5460 </body>
5461 </subsection>
5462 </section>
5463 <section>
5464 <title>Installing the SPARC Bootloader: SILO</title>
5465 <body>
5466
5467 <p>
5468 It is now time to install and configure <uri
5469 link="http://www.sparc-boot.org">SILO</uri>, the Sparc Improved boot
5470 LOader.
5471 </p>
5472
5473 <pre caption = "Installing SILO">
5474 # <i>emerge silo</i>
5475 </pre>
5476
5477 <p>
5478 Now open up your favorite editor (we use <c>nano</c> as an example) and
5479 create <path>/etc/silo.conf</path>.
5480 </p>
5481
5482 <pre caption = "Creating /etc/silo.conf">
5483 # <i>nano -w /etc/silo.conf</i>
5484 </pre>
5485
5486 <p>
5487 Below you'll find an example <path>silo.conf</path> file. It uses the
5488 partitioning scheme we use throughout this book and
5489 <path>kernel-2.4.29</path> as kernelimage.
5490 </p>
5491
5492 <pre caption = "Example /etc/silo.conf">
5493 partition = 1 <comment># Boot partition (= root partition)</comment>
5494 root = /dev/sda1 <comment># Root partition</comment>
5495 timeout = 150 <comment># Wait 15 seconds before booting the default section</comment>
5496
5497 image = /boot/kernel-2.4.29
5498 label = linux
5499 </pre>
5500
5501 <p>
5502 If you use the example <path>silo.conf</path> delivered by Portage, be
5503 sure to comment out <e>all</e> lines that you do not need.
5504 </p>
5505
5506 <p>
5507 If the physical disk on which you want to install SILO (as bootloader) differs
5508 from the physical disk on which <path>/etc/silo.conf</path> resides, you must
5509 copy over <path>/etc/silo.conf</path> to a partition on that disk. Assuming that
5510 <path>/boot</path> is a separate partition on that disk, copy over the
5511 configuration file to <path>/boot</path> and run <c>/sbin/silo</c>:
5512 </p>
5513
5514 <pre caption = "Only if /boot and the SILO destination are on the same disk">
5515 # <i>cp /etc/silo.conf /boot</i>
5516 # <i>/sbin/silo -C /boot/silo.conf</i>
5517 /boot/silo.conf appears to be valid
5518 </pre>
5519
5520 <p>
5521 Otherwise just run <c>/sbin/silo</c>:
5522 </p>
5523
5524 <pre caption = "Run silo">
5525 # <i>/sbin/silo</i>
5526 /etc/silo.conf appears to be valid
5527 </pre>
5528
5529 <p>
5530 Now continue with <uri link="#reboot">Rebooting the System</uri>.
5531 </p>
5532
5533 </body>
5534 </section>
5535 <section id="reboot">
5536 <title>Rebooting the System</title>
5537 <subsection>
5538 <body>
5539
5540 <p>
5541 Exit the chrooted environment and unmount all mounted partitions. Then type in
5542 that one magical command you have been waiting for: <c>reboot</c>.
5543 </p>
5544
5545 <pre caption="Exiting the chroot, unmounting all partitions and rebooting">
5546 # <i>exit</i>
5547 cdimage ~# <i>cd</i>
5548 cdimage ~# <i>umount /mnt/gentoo/boot /mnt/gentoo/proc /mnt/gentoo</i>
5549 cdimage ~# <i>reboot</i>
5550 </pre>
5551
5552 <p>
5553 Of course, don't forget to remove the bootable CD, otherwise the CD will be
5554 booted again instead of your new Gentoo system.
5555 </p>
5556
5557 <p>
5558 Once rebooted in your Gentoo installation, finish up with <uri
5559 link="?part=1&amp;chap=11">Finalizing your Gentoo Installation</uri>.
5560 </p>
5561
5562 </body>
5563 </subsection>
5564 </section>
5565 </sections>
5566
5567
5568
5569 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-disk.xml
5570
5571 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
5572 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
5573
5574 Index: hb-install-sparc-disk.xml
5575 ===================================================================
5576 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
5577 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
5578
5579 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
5580 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.5 -->
5581
5582 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-disk.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
5583
5584 <sections>
5585
5586 <version>4.2</version>
5587 <date>2005-08-02</date>
5588
5589 <section>
5590 <title>Introduction to Block Devices</title>
5591 <subsection>
5592 <title>Block Devices</title>
5593 <body>
5594
5595 <p>
5596 We'll take a good look at some of the disk-oriented aspects of Gentoo Linux
5597 and Linux in general, including Linux filesystems, partitions, and block
5598 devices. Then, once you're familiar with the ins and outs of disks and
5599 filesystems, you'll be guided through the process of setting up partitions
5600 and filesystems for your Gentoo Linux installation.
5601 </p>
5602
5603 <p>
5604 To begin, we introduce <e>block devices</e>. The most typical block device is
5605 probably the one that represents the first SCSI hard disk in a Linux system,
5606 namely <path>/dev/sda</path>.
5607 </p>
5608
5609 <p>
5610 Block devices represent an abstract interface to the disk. User programs can
5611 use these block devices to interact with your disk without worrying about
5612 whether your drives are IDE, SCSI, or something else. The program can simply
5613 address the storage on the disk as a bunch of contiguous, randomly-accessible
5614 512-byte blocks.
5615 </p>
5616
5617 <p>
5618 Block devices show up as entries in <path>/dev/</path>. Typically, the first
5619 SCSI drive is named <path>/dev/sda</path>, the second <path>/dev/sdb</path>,
5620 and so on. IDE drives are named similarly, however, they are prefixed by hd-
5621 instead of sd-. If you are using IDE drives, the first one will be named
5622 <path>/dev/hda</path>, the second <path>/dev/hdb</path>, and so on.
5623 </p>
5624
5625 </body>
5626 </subsection>
5627 <subsection>
5628 <title>Partitions</title>
5629 <body>
5630
5631 <p>
5632 Although it is theoretically possible to use the entire disk to house your Linux
5633 system, this is almost never done in practice. Instead, full disk block devices
5634 are split up in smaller, more manageable block devices. These are known as
5635 <e>partitions</e> or <e>slices</e>.
5636 </p>
5637
5638 <p>
5639 The first partition on the first SCSI disk is <path>/dev/sda1</path>, the second
5640 <path>/dev/sda2</path> and so on. Similarly, the first two partitions on the
5641 first IDE disk are <path>/dev/hda1</path> and <path>/dev/hda2</path>.
5642 </p>
5643
5644 <p>
5645 The third partition on Sun systems is set aside as a special "whole disk"
5646 slice. This partition must not contain a file system.
5647 </p>
5648
5649 <p>
5650 Users who are used to the DOS partitioning scheme should note that Sun
5651 disklabels do not have "primary" and "extended" partitions. Instead, up to
5652 eight partitions are available per drive, with the third of these being
5653 reserved.
5654 </p>
5655
5656 </body>
5657 </subsection>
5658 </section>
5659 <section>
5660 <title>Designing a Partitioning Scheme</title>
5661 <subsection>
5662 <title>Default Partitioning Scheme</title>
5663 <body>
5664
5665 <p>
5666 If you are not interested in drawing up a partitioning scheme,
5667 the table below suggests a suitable starting point for most systems. For
5668 IDE-based systems, substitute <c>hda</c> for <c>sda</c> in the following.
5669 </p>
5670
5671 <p>
5672 Note that a separate <path>/boot</path> partition is generally <e>not</e>
5673 recommended on SPARC, as it complicates the bootloader configuration.
5674 </p>
5675
5676 <table>
5677 <tr>
5678 <th>Partition</th>
5679 <th>Filesystem</th>
5680 <th>Size</th>
5681 <th>Mount Point</th>
5682 <th>Description</th>
5683 </tr>
5684 <tr>
5685 <ti>/dev/sda1</ti>
5686 <ti>ext3</ti>
5687 <ti>&lt;2 GByte</ti>
5688 <ti>/</ti>
5689 <ti>
5690 Root partition. For all sparc32 systems, and sparc64 systems with older
5691 OBP versions, this <e>must</e> be less than 2 GBytes in size, and the first
5692 partition on the disk.
5693 </ti>
5694 </tr>
5695 <tr>
5696 <ti>/dev/sda2</ti>
5697 <ti>swap</ti>
5698 <ti>512 MBytes</ti>
5699 <ti>none</ti>
5700 <ti>
5701 Swap partition. For bootstrap and certain larger compiles, at least 512
5702 MBytes of RAM (including swap) is required.
5703 </ti>
5704 </tr>
5705 <tr>
5706 <ti>/dev/sda3</ti>
5707 <ti>none</ti>
5708 <ti>Whole disk</ti>
5709 <ti>none</ti>
5710 <ti>Whole disk partition. This is required on SPARC systems.</ti>
5711 </tr>
5712 <tr>
5713 <ti>/dev/sda4</ti>
5714 <ti>ext3</ti>
5715 <ti>at least 2 GBytes</ti>
5716 <ti>/usr</ti>
5717 <ti>
5718 /usr partition. Applications are installed here. By default this partition
5719 is also used for Portage data (which takes around 500 Mbyte excluding
5720 source code).
5721 </ti>
5722 </tr>
5723 <tr>
5724 <ti>/dev/sda5</ti>
5725 <ti>ext3</ti>
5726 <ti>at least 1GByte</ti>
5727 <ti>/var</ti>
5728 <ti>
5729 /var partition. Used for program-generated data. By default Portage uses
5730 this partition for temporary space whilst compiling. Certain larger
5731 applications such as Mozilla and OpenOffice.org can require over 1 GByte
5732 of temporary space here when building.
5733 </ti>
5734 </tr>
5735 <tr>
5736 <ti>/dev/sda6</ti>
5737 <ti>ext3</ti>
5738 <ti>remaining space</ti>
5739 <ti>/home</ti>
5740 <ti>/home partition. Used for users' home directories.</ti>
5741 </tr>
5742 </table>
5743
5744 </body>
5745 </subsection>
5746 </section>
5747
5748 <section id="fdisk">
5749 <title>Using fdisk to Partition your Disk</title>
5750 <subsection>
5751 <body>
5752
5753 <p>
5754 The following parts explain how to create the example partition layout described
5755 previously, namely:
5756 </p>
5757
5758 <table>
5759 <tr>
5760 <th>Partition</th>
5761 <th>Description</th>
5762 </tr>
5763 <tr>
5764 <ti>/dev/sda1</ti>
5765 <ti>/</ti>
5766 </tr>
5767 <tr>
5768 <ti>/dev/sda2</ti>
5769 <ti>swap</ti>
5770 </tr>
5771 <tr>
5772 <ti>/dev/sda3</ti>
5773 <ti>whole disk slice</ti>
5774 </tr>
5775
5776
5777
5778 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-kernel.xml
5779
5780 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
5781 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
5782
5783 Index: hb-install-sparc-kernel.xml
5784 ===================================================================
5785 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
5786 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
5787
5788 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
5789 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
5790
5791 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-kernel.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
5792
5793 <sections>
5794
5795 <version>4.2</version>
5796 <date>2005-06-02</date>
5797
5798 <section>
5799 <title>Timezone</title>
5800 <body>
5801
5802 <p>
5803 You first need to select your timezone so that your system knows where it is
5804 located. Look for your timezone in <path>/usr/share/zoneinfo</path>, then make a
5805 symlink to <path>/etc/localtime</path> using <c>ln</c>:
5806 </p>
5807
5808 <pre caption="Setting the timezone information">
5809 # <i>ls /usr/share/zoneinfo</i>
5810 <comment>(Suppose you want to use GMT)</comment>
5811 # <i>ln -sf /usr/share/zoneinfo/GMT /etc/localtime</i>
5812 </pre>
5813
5814 </body>
5815 </section>
5816 <section>
5817 <title>Installing the Sources</title>
5818 <subsection>
5819 <title>Choosing a Kernel</title>
5820 <body>
5821
5822 <p>
5823 The core around which all distributions are built is the Linux kernel. It is the
5824 layer between the user programs and your system hardware. Gentoo provides its
5825 users several possible kernel sources. A full listing with description is
5826 available at the <uri link="/doc/en/gentoo-kernel.xml">Gentoo Kernel
5827 Guide</uri>.
5828 </p>
5829
5830 <p>
5831 For sparc-based systems we have <c>sparc-sources</c> (kernel source optimized
5832 for SPARC users) and <c>vanilla-sources</c> (the default kernel source as
5833 developed by the linux-kernel developers).
5834 </p>
5835
5836 <p>
5837 Choose your kernel source and install it using <c>emerge</c>.
5838 </p>
5839
5840 <p>
5841 In the next example we install the <c>sparc-sources</c>.
5842 Of course substitute with your choice of sources, this is merely an example:
5843 </p>
5844
5845 <pre caption="Installing a kernel source">
5846 # <i>emerge sparc-sources</i>
5847 </pre>
5848
5849 <p>
5850 When you take a look in <path>/usr/src</path> you should see a symlink called
5851 <path>linux</path> pointing to your kernel source:
5852 </p>
5853
5854 <pre caption="Viewing the kernel source symlink">
5855 # <i>ls -l /usr/src/linux</i>
5856 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 12 Oct 13 11:04 /usr/src/linux -&gt; linux-2.4.29-sparc
5857 </pre>
5858
5859 <p>
5860 If this isn't the case (i.e. the symlink points to a different kernel source)
5861 change the symlink before you continue:
5862 </p>
5863
5864 <pre caption="Changing the kernel source symlink">
5865 # <i>rm /usr/src/linux</i>
5866 # <i>cd /usr/src</i>
5867 # <i>ln -s linux-2.4.29-sparc linux</i>
5868 </pre>
5869
5870 <p>
5871 Now it is time to configure and compile your kernel source.
5872 </p>
5873
5874 </body>
5875 </subsection>
5876 </section>
5877 <section>
5878 <title>Manual Configuration</title>
5879 <subsection>
5880 <title>Introduction</title>
5881 <body>
5882
5883 <p>
5884 Manually configuring a kernel is often seen as the most difficult procedure a
5885 Linux user ever has to perform. Nothing is less true -- after configuring a
5886 couple of kernels you don't even remember that it was difficult ;)
5887 </p>
5888
5889 <p>
5890 However, one thing <e>is</e> true: you must know your system when you start
5891 configuring a kernel manually. Most information can be gathered by emerging
5892 pciutils (<c>emerge pciutils</c>) which contains <c>lspci</c>. You will now
5893 be able to use <c>lspci</c> within the chrooted environment. You may safely
5894 ignore any <e>pcilib</e> warnings (like pcilib: cannot open
5895 /sys/bus/pci/devices) that <c>lspci</c> throws out. Alternatively, you can run
5896 <c>lspci</c> from a <e>non-chrooted</e> environment. The results are the same.
5897 You can also run <c>lsmod</c> to see what kernel modules the Installation CD
5898 uses (it might provide you with a nice hint on what to enable).
5899 </p>
5900
5901 <p>
5902 Now go to your kernel source directory and execute <c>make menuconfig</c>. This
5903 will fire up an ncurses-based configuration menu.
5904 </p>
5905
5906 <pre caption="Invoking menuconfig">
5907 # <i>cd /usr/src/linux</i>
5908 # <i>make menuconfig</i>
5909 </pre>
5910
5911 <p>
5912 You will be greeted with several configuration sections. We'll first list some
5913 options you must activate (otherwise Gentoo will not function, or not function
5914 properly without additional tweaks).
5915 </p>
5916
5917 </body>
5918 </subsection>
5919 <subsection>
5920 <title>Activating Required Options</title>
5921 <body>
5922
5923 <p>
5924 First of all, activate the use of development and experimental code/drivers.
5925 You need this, otherwise some very important code/drivers won't show up:
5926 </p>
5927
5928 <pre caption="Selecting experimental code/drivers">
5929 Code maturity level options ---&gt;
5930 [*] Prompt for development and/or incomplete code/drivers
5931 </pre>
5932
5933 <p>
5934 Now go to <c>File Systems</c> and select support for the filesystems you use.
5935 <e>Don't</e> compile them as modules, otherwise your Gentoo system will not be
5936 able to mount your partitions. Also select <c>Virtual memory</c>, <c>/proc
5937 file system</c>, <c>/dev file system</c> + <c>Automatically mount at boot</c>:
5938 </p>
5939
5940 <pre caption="Selecting necessary file systems">
5941 File systems ---&gt;
5942 [*] Virtual memory file system support (former shm fs)
5943 [*] /proc file system support
5944 [*] /dev file system support (EXPERIMENTAL)
5945 [*] Automatically mount at boot
5946 [ ] /dev/pts file system for Unix98 PTYs
5947
5948 <comment>(Select one or more of the following options as needed by your system)</comment>
5949 &lt;*&gt; Ext3 journalling file system support
5950 &lt;*&gt; Second extended fs support
5951 </pre>
5952
5953 <p>
5954 If you are using PPPoE to connect to the Internet or you are using a dial-up
5955 modem, you will need the following options in the kernel:
5956 </p>
5957
5958 <pre caption="Selecting PPPoE necessary drivers">
5959 Network device support ---&gt;
5960 &lt;*&gt; PPP (point-to-point protocol) support
5961 &lt;*&gt; PPP support for async serial ports
5962 &lt;*&gt; PPP support for sync tty ports
5963 </pre>
5964
5965 <p>
5966 The two compression options won't harm but are not definitely needed, neither
5967 does the <c>PPP over Ethernet</c> option, that might only be used by
5968 <c>rp-pppoe</c> when configured to do kernel mode PPPoE.
5969 </p>
5970
5971 <p>
5972 Now activate the correct bus-support:
5973 </p>
5974
5975 <pre caption="Activating SBUS/UPA">
5976 Console drivers ---&gt;
5977 Frame-buffer support ---&gt;
5978 [*] SBUS and UPA framebuffers
5979 [*] Creator/Creator3D support <comment>(Only for UPA slot adapter used in many Ultras)</comment>
5980 [*] CGsix (GX,TurboGX) support <comment>(Only for SBUS slot adapter used in many SPARCStations)</comment>
5981 </pre>
5982
5983 <p>
5984
5985
5986
5987 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-medium.xml
5988
5989 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
5990 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
5991
5992 Index: hb-install-sparc-medium.xml
5993 ===================================================================
5994 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
5995 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
5996
5997 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
5998 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
5999
6000 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-sparc-medium.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
6001
6002 <sections>
6003
6004 <version>4.2</version>
6005 <date>2005-05-23</date>
6006
6007 <section>
6008 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
6009 <subsection>
6010 <title>Introduction</title>
6011 <body>
6012
6013 <p>
6014 Before we start, we first list what hardware requirements you need to
6015 successfully install Gentoo on your box.
6016 </p>
6017
6018 </body>
6019 </subsection>
6020 <subsection>
6021 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
6022 <body>
6023
6024 <table>
6025 <tr>
6026 <th>Sparc System</th>
6027 <ti>
6028 Please check the <uri
6029 link="http://www.ultralinux.org/faq.html#s_2">UltraLinux FAQ</uri>
6030 </ti>
6031 </tr>
6032 <tr>
6033 <th>CPU</th>
6034 <ti>
6035 Although sparc64 is the only officially supported platform, experimental
6036 support for sparc32 is available as well
6037 </ti>
6038 </tr>
6039 <tr>
6040 <th>Memory</th>
6041 <ti>64 MB</ti>
6042 </tr>
6043 <tr>
6044 <th>Diskspace</th>
6045 <ti>1.5 GB (excluding swap space)</ti>
6046 </tr>
6047 <tr>
6048 <th>Swap space</th>
6049 <ti>At least 256 MB</ti>
6050 </tr>
6051 </table>
6052
6053 <p>
6054 We currently only provide Installation CDs for the sparc64 architecture. Users
6055 of sparc32 can use the experimental netboot images to install Gentoo from.
6056 More information about netbooting can be found in our <uri
6057 link="/doc/en/gentoo-sparc-netboot-howto.xml">Gentoo Linux based Netboot
6058 HOWTO</uri>.
6059 </p>
6060
6061 </body>
6062 </subsection>
6063 </section>
6064 <!-- Copy/Paste from hb-install-x86-medium.xml -->
6065 <!-- START -->
6066 <section>
6067 <title>The Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
6068 <subsection>
6069 <title>Introduction</title>
6070 <body>
6071
6072 <p>
6073 Gentoo Linux can be installed using one of three <e>stage</e> tarball files. A
6074 stage file is a tarball (compressed archive) that contains a minimal
6075 environment.
6076 </p>
6077
6078 <ul>
6079 <li>
6080 A stage1 file contains nothing more than a compiler, Portage (Gentoo's
6081 software management system) and a couple of packages on which the
6082 compiler or Portage depends.
6083 </li>
6084 <li>
6085 A stage2 file contains a so-called bootstrapped system, a minimal
6086 environment from which one can start building all other necessary
6087 applications that make a Gentoo environment complete.
6088 </li>
6089 <li>
6090 A stage3 file contains a prebuilt minimal system which is almost fully
6091 deployable. It only lacks a few applications where you, the Gentoo user,
6092 needs to choose which one you want to install.
6093 </li>
6094 </ul>
6095
6096 <p>
6097 We will opt for a stage3 installation throughout this document. If you want to
6098 perform a Gentoo installation using the stage1 or stage2 files, please use the
6099 installation instructions in the <uri
6100 link="/doc/en/handbook/handbook-sparc.xml">Gentoo Handbook</uri>. They do
6101 require a working Internet connection though.
6102 </p>
6103
6104 </body>
6105 </subsection>
6106 <subsection>
6107 <title>Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
6108 <body>
6109
6110 <p>
6111 An Installation CD is a bootable medium which contains a self-sustained Gentoo
6112 environment. It allows you to boot Linux from the CD. During the boot process
6113 your hardware is detected and the appropriate drivers are loaded. The Gentoo
6114 Installation CDs are maintained by Gentoo developers.
6115 </p>
6116
6117 <p>
6118 There currently are two Installation CDs available:
6119 </p>
6120
6121 <ul>
6122 <li>
6123 The Universal Installation CD contains everything you need to install
6124 Gentoo. It provides stage3 files for common architectures, source code
6125 for the extra applications you need to choose from and, of course, the
6126 installation instructions for your architecture.
6127 </li>
6128 <li>
6129 The Minimal Installation CD contains only a minimal environment that allows
6130 you to boot up and configure your network so you can connect to the
6131 Internet. It does not contain any additional files and cannot be used
6132 during the current installation approach.
6133 </li>
6134 </ul>
6135
6136 <p>
6137 Gentoo also provides a Package CD. This is no Installation CD but an additional
6138 resource that you can exploit during the installation of your Gentoo system. It
6139 contains prebuilt packages (the so-called GRP set) that allows you to easily
6140 and quickly install additional applications (such as OpenOffice.org, KDE,
6141 GNOME, ...) immediately after the Gentoo installation and right before you
6142 update your Portage tree.
6143 </p>
6144
6145 <p>
6146 The use of the Package CD is covered later in this document.
6147 </p>
6148
6149 </body>
6150 </subsection>
6151 </section>
6152 <!-- STOP -->
6153 <section>
6154 <title>Download, Burn and Boot a Gentoo Installation CD</title>
6155 <subsection>
6156 <title>Downloading and Burning the Installation CDs</title>
6157 <body>
6158
6159 <p>
6160 You can download the Universal Installation CD (and, if you want to, the
6161 Packages CD as well) from one of our <uri
6162 link="/main/en/mirrors.xml">mirrors</uri>. The Installation CDs are located in
6163 the <path>releases/sparc/2005.0/installcd/sparc64</path>
6164 directory; the Package CDs are located in the
6165 <path>releases/sparc/2005.0/packagecd/sparc64</path> directory.
6166 </p>
6167
6168 <p>
6169 Inside those directories you'll find so-called ISO-files.
6170 Those are full CD images which you can write on a CD-R.
6171 </p>
6172
6173 <p>
6174 After downloading the file, you can verify its integrity to see if it is
6175 corrupted or not:
6176 </p>
6177
6178 <ul>
6179 <li>
6180 You can check its MD5 checksum and compare it with the MD5 checksum we
6181 provide (for instance with the <c>md5sum</c> tool under Linux/Unix or
6182 <uri link="http://www.etree.org/md5com.html">md5sum</uri> for Windows)
6183 </li>
6184 <li>
6185 You can verify the cryptographic signature that we provide. You need to
6186 obtain the public key we use (17072058) before you proceed though.
6187 </li>
6188 </ul>
6189
6190 <p>
6191 To fetch our public key using the GnuPG application, run the following command:
6192 </p>
6193
6194
6195
6196 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-stage.xml
6197
6198 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-stage.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
6199 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-stage.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
6200
6201 Index: hb-install-stage.xml
6202 ===================================================================
6203 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
6204 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
6205
6206 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
6207 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
6208
6209 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-stage.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
6210
6211 <sections>
6212
6213 <version>4.2</version>
6214 <date>2005-05-04</date>
6215
6216 <section>
6217 <title>Installing a Stage Tarball</title>
6218 <subsection>
6219 <title>Setting the Date/Time Right</title>
6220 <body>
6221
6222 <p>
6223 Before you continue you need to check your date/time and update it. A
6224 misconfigured clock may lead to strange results in the future!
6225 </p>
6226
6227 <p>
6228 To verify the current date/time, run <c>date</c>:
6229 </p>
6230
6231 <pre caption="Verifying the date/time">
6232 # <i>date</i>
6233 Fri Mar 29 16:21:18 CEST 2005
6234 </pre>
6235
6236 <p>
6237 If the date/time displayed is wrong, update it using the <c>date
6238 MMDDhhmmYYYY</c> syntax (<b>M</b>onth, <b>D</b>ay, <b>h</b>our, <b>m</b>inute
6239 and <b>Y</b>ear). For instance, to set the date to Mar 29th, 16:21 in the
6240 year 2005:
6241 </p>
6242
6243 <pre caption="Setting the date/time">
6244 # <i>date 032916212005</i>
6245 </pre>
6246
6247 </body>
6248 </subsection>
6249 <subsection>
6250 <title>Locating the Stage3 File</title>
6251 <body>
6252
6253 <p>
6254 If you have configured networking because you need to download a stage3 file for
6255 your architecture, continue with <uri link="#download">Alternative: Using a
6256 Stage3 from the Internet</uri>. Otherwise read <uri link="#available">Default:
6257 Using a Stage3 from the Installation CD</uri>.
6258 </p>
6259
6260 </body>
6261 </subsection>
6262 </section>
6263 <section id="available">
6264 <title>Default: Using a Stage from the Installation CD</title>
6265 <subsection>
6266 <title>Extracting the Stage Tarball</title>
6267 <body>
6268
6269 <p>
6270 The stages on the CD reside in the <path>/mnt/cdrom/stages</path> directory. To
6271 see a listing of available stages, use <c>ls</c>:
6272 </p>
6273
6274 <pre caption="List all available stages">
6275 # <i>ls /mnt/cdrom/stages</i>
6276 </pre>
6277
6278 <p>
6279 If the system replies with an error, you may need to mount the CD-ROM first:
6280 </p>
6281
6282 <pre caption="Mounting the CD-ROM">
6283 # <i>ls /mnt/cdrom/stages</i>
6284 ls: /mnt/cdrom/stages: No such file or directory
6285 # <i>mount /dev/cdroms/cdrom0 /mnt/cdrom</i>
6286 # <i>ls /mnt/cdrom/stages</i>
6287 </pre>
6288
6289 <p>
6290 Now go into your Gentoo mountpoint (usually <path>/mnt/gentoo</path>):
6291 </p>
6292
6293 <pre caption="Changing directory to /mnt/gentoo">
6294 # <i>cd /mnt/gentoo</i>
6295 </pre>
6296
6297 <p>
6298 We will now extract the stage tarball of your choice. We will do this with the
6299 GNU <c>tar</c> tool. Make sure you use the same options (<c>-xvjpf</c>)! The
6300 <c>x</c> stands for <e>Extract</e>, the <c>v</c> for <e>Verbose</e> to see what
6301 happens during the extraction process (this one is optional), the <c>j</c> for
6302 <e>Decompress with bzip2</e>, the <c>p</c> for <e>Preserve permissions</e> and
6303 the <c>f</c> to denote that we want to extract a file, not standard input. In
6304 the next example, we extract the stage tarball
6305 <path>stage3-&lt;subarch&gt;-2005.0.tar.bz2</path>. Be sure to substitute the
6306 tarball filename with your stage.
6307 </p>
6308
6309 <pre caption="Extracting the stage tarball">
6310 # <i>tar -xvjpf /mnt/cdrom/stages/stage3-&lt;subarch&gt;-2005.0.tar.bz2</i>
6311 </pre>
6312
6313 <p>
6314 Now that the stage is installed, continue with <uri
6315 link="#installing_portage">Installing Portage</uri>.
6316 </p>
6317
6318 </body>
6319 </subsection>
6320 </section>
6321 <section id="download">
6322 <title>Alternative: Using a Stage from the Internet</title>
6323 <subsection>
6324 <title>Downloading the Stage Tarball</title>
6325 <body>
6326
6327 <p>
6328 Go to the Gentoo mountpoint at which you mounted your filesystems
6329 (most likely <path>/mnt/gentoo</path>):
6330 </p>
6331
6332 <pre caption="Going to the Gentoo mountpoint">
6333 # <i>cd /mnt/gentoo</i>
6334 </pre>
6335
6336 <p>
6337 Depending on your installation medium, you have a couple of tools available to
6338 download a stage. If you have <c>links2</c> available, then you can immediately
6339 surf to <uri link="/main/en/mirrors.xml">the Gentoo mirrorlist</uri> and
6340 choose a mirror close to you.
6341 </p>
6342
6343 <p>
6344 If you don't have <c>links2</c> available you should have <c>lynx</c> at your
6345 disposal. If you need to go through a proxy, export the <c>http_proxy</c> and
6346 <c>ftp_proxy</c> variables:
6347 </p>
6348
6349 <pre caption="Setting proxy information for lynx">
6350 # <i>export http_proxy="http://proxy.server.com:port"</i>
6351 # <i>export ftp_proxy="http://proxy.server.com:port"</i>
6352 </pre>
6353
6354 <p>
6355 We will now assume that you have <c>links2</c> at your disposal.
6356 </p>
6357
6358 <p>
6359 Pick the <path>releases/</path> directory, followed by your architecture (for
6360 instance <path>x86/</path>) and the Gentoo version (<path>2005.0/</path>)
6361 to finish up with the <path>stages/</path> directory. There you should see all
6362 available stage files for your architecture (they might be stored within
6363 subdirectories named to the individual sub architectures). Select one and
6364 press <c>D</c> to download. When you're finished, press <c>Q</c> to quit the
6365 browser.
6366 </p>
6367
6368 <pre caption="Surfing to the mirror listing with links2">
6369 # <i>links2 http://www.gentoo.org/main/en/mirrors.xml</i>
6370
6371 <comment>(If you need proxy support with links2:)</comment>
6372 # <i>links2 -http-proxy proxy.server.com:8080 http://www.gentoo.org/main/en/mirrors.xml</i>
6373 </pre>
6374
6375 <p>
6376 If you want to check the integrity of the downloaded stage tarball, use
6377 <c>md5sum</c> and compare the output with the MD5 checksum provided on the
6378 mirror. For instance, to check the validity of the x86 stage tarball:
6379 </p>
6380
6381 <pre caption="Example checking integrity of a stage tarball">
6382 # <i>md5sum -c stage3-x86-2005.0.tar.bz2.md5</i>
6383 stage3-x86-2005.0.tar.bz2: OK
6384 </pre>
6385
6386 </body>
6387 </subsection>
6388 <subsection>
6389 <title>Unpacking the Stage Tarball</title>
6390 <body>
6391
6392 <p>
6393 Now unpack your downloaded stage onto your system. We use GNU's <c>tar</c> to
6394 proceed as it is the easiest method:
6395 </p>
6396
6397 <pre caption="Unpacking the stage">
6398 # <i>tar -xvjpf stage3-*.tar.bz2</i>
6399 </pre>
6400
6401 <p>
6402
6403
6404
6405 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-system.xml
6406
6407 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-system.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
6408 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-system.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
6409
6410 Index: hb-install-system.xml
6411 ===================================================================
6412 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
6413 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
6414
6415 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
6416 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
6417
6418 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-system.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
6419
6420 <sections>
6421
6422 <version>4.00</version>
6423 <date>2005-01-07</date>
6424
6425 <section>
6426 <title>Chrooting</title>
6427 <subsection>
6428 <title>Mounting the proc Filesystem</title>
6429 <body>
6430
6431 <p>
6432 Mount the <path>/proc</path> filesystem on <path>/mnt/gentoo/proc</path> to
6433 allow the installation to use the kernel-provided information even within the
6434 chrooted environment.
6435 </p>
6436
6437 <pre caption="Mounting /proc">
6438 # <i>mount -t proc none /mnt/gentoo/proc</i>
6439 </pre>
6440
6441 </body>
6442 </subsection>
6443 <subsection>
6444 <title>Optional: Copy over DNS Information</title>
6445 <body>
6446
6447 <p>
6448 If you configured your network to fetch the appropriate stage file later on from
6449 the Internet, you need to copy over the DNS information stored in
6450 <path>/etc/resolv.conf</path> to <path>/mnt/gentoo/etc/resolv.conf</path>. This
6451 file contains the nameservers your system will use to resolve names to IP
6452 addresses.
6453 </p>
6454
6455 <pre caption="Copy over DNS Information">
6456 # <i>cp -L /etc/resolv.conf /mnt/gentoo/etc/resolv.conf</i>
6457 </pre>
6458
6459 </body>
6460 </subsection>
6461 <subsection>
6462 <title>Entering the new Environment</title>
6463 <body>
6464
6465 <p>
6466 Now that all partitions are initialized and the base environment
6467 installed, it is time to enter our new installation environment by
6468 <e>chrooting</e> into it. This means that we change from the current
6469 installation environment to your installation system (namely the
6470 initialized partitions).
6471 </p>
6472
6473 <p>
6474 This chrooting is done in three steps. First we will change the root
6475 from <path>/</path> (on the installation medium) to <path>/mnt/gentoo</path>
6476 (on your partitions) using <c>chroot</c>. Then we will create a new environment
6477 using <c>env-update</c>, which essentially creates environment variables.
6478 Finally, we load those variables into memory using <c>source</c>.
6479 </p>
6480
6481 <pre caption = "Chrooting into the new environment">
6482 # <i>chroot /mnt/gentoo /bin/bash</i>
6483 # <i>env-update</i>
6484 * Caching service dependencies...
6485 # <i>source /etc/profile</i>
6486 </pre>
6487
6488 <p>
6489 Congratulations! You are now inside your own Gentoo Linux environment.
6490 Of course it is far from finished, which is why the installation still
6491 has some sections left :-)
6492 </p>
6493
6494 </body>
6495 </subsection>
6496 </section>
6497 <section id="configure_USE">
6498 <title>Configuring the USE Variable</title>
6499 <subsection>
6500 <title>What is the USE Variable?</title>
6501 <body>
6502
6503 <p>
6504 <c>USE</c> is one of the most powerful variables Gentoo provides to its users.
6505 Several programs can be compiled with or without optional support for certain
6506 items. For instance, some programs can be compiled with gtk-support, or with
6507 qt-support. Others can be compiled with or without SSL support. Some programs
6508 can even be compiled with framebuffer support (svgalib) instead of X11 support
6509 (X-server).
6510 </p>
6511
6512 <p>
6513 Most distributions compile their packages with support for as much as possible,
6514 increasing the size of the programs and startup time, not to mention an enormous
6515 amount of dependencies. With Gentoo you can define what options a package
6516 should be compiled with. This is where <c>USE</c> comes into play.
6517 </p>
6518
6519 <p>
6520 In the <c>USE</c> variable you define keywords which are mapped onto
6521 compile-options. For instance, <e>ssl</e> will compile ssl-support in the
6522 programs that support it. <e>-X</e> will remove X-server support (note the minus
6523 sign in front). <e>gnome gtk -kde -qt</e> will compile your programs with gnome
6524 (and gtk) support, and not with kde (and qt) support, making your system fully
6525 tweaked for GNOME.
6526 </p>
6527
6528 </body>
6529 </subsection>
6530 <subsection>
6531 <title>Modifying the USE Variable</title>
6532 <body>
6533
6534 <warn>
6535 Do not make any modifications to the USE variable yet if you plan to use our
6536 prebuilt packages (GRP set). You can alter the USE variable after having
6537 installed the packages you want. Gremlins are known to attack your system
6538 if you ignore this warning!
6539 </warn>
6540
6541 <p>
6542 The default <c>USE</c> settings are placed in
6543 <path>/etc/make.profile/make.defaults</path>. What you place in
6544 <path>/etc/make.conf</path> is calculated against these defaults settings. If
6545 you add something to the <c>USE</c> setting, it is added to the default list. If
6546 you remove something from the <c>USE</c> setting (by placing a minus sign in
6547 front of it) it is removed from the default list (if it was in the default list
6548 at all). <e>Never</e> alter anything inside the <path>/etc/make.profile</path>
6549 directory; it gets overwritten when you update Portage!
6550 </p>
6551
6552 <p>
6553 A full description on <c>USE</c> can be found in the second part of the Gentoo
6554 Handbook, <uri link="?part=2&amp;chap=2">USE flags</uri>. A full description on
6555 the available USE flags can be found on your system in
6556 <path>/usr/portage/profiles/use.desc</path>.
6557 </p>
6558
6559 <pre caption="Viewing available USE flags">
6560 # <i>less /usr/portage/profiles/use.desc</i>
6561 <comment>(You can scroll using your arrow keys, exit by pressing 'q')</comment>
6562 </pre>
6563
6564 <p>
6565 As an example we show a <c>USE</c> setting for a KDE-based system with DVD, ALSA
6566 and CD Recording support:
6567 </p>
6568
6569 <pre caption="Opening /etc/make.conf">
6570 # <i>nano -w /etc/make.conf</i>
6571 </pre>
6572
6573 <pre caption="USE setting">
6574 USE="-gtk -gnome qt kde dvd alsa cdr"
6575 </pre>
6576
6577 </body>
6578 </subsection>
6579 </section>
6580 </sections>
6581
6582
6583
6584 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-tools.xml
6585
6586 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-tools.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
6587 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-tools.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
6588
6589 Index: hb-install-tools.xml
6590 ===================================================================
6591 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
6592 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
6593
6594 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
6595 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
6596
6597 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-tools.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
6598
6599 <sections>
6600
6601 <version>4.00</version>
6602 <date>2005-02-04</date>
6603
6604 <section>
6605 <title>System Logger</title>
6606 <body>
6607
6608 <p>
6609 The first tool you need to decide on has to provide logging facilities for your
6610 system. Unix and Linux have an excellent history of logging capabilities -- if
6611 you want you can log everything that happens on your system in logfiles. This
6612 happens through the <e>system logger</e>.
6613 </p>
6614
6615 <p>
6616 Gentoo offers several system loggers to choose from. There are <c>sysklogd</c>,
6617 which is the traditional set of system logging daemons, <c>syslog-ng</c>, an
6618 advanced system logger, and <c>metalog</c> which is a highly-configurable
6619 system logger. Others might be available through Portage as well - our number of
6620 available packages increases on a daily basis.
6621 </p>
6622
6623 <p>
6624 If you plan on using <c>sysklogd</c> or <c>syslog-ng</c> you might want to
6625 install <c>logrotate</c> afterwards as those system loggers don't provide any
6626 rotation mechanism for the log files.
6627 </p>
6628
6629 <!--
6630 Even though syslog-ng does not rotate the logs, it does conform to the syslog
6631 RFC (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc3164.html) and is far more powerful than most other system loggers. That and some architectures really prefer syslog-ng
6632 above others (metalog for instance doesn't work nicely with sparc all the
6633 time).
6634 -->
6635
6636 <p>
6637 To install the system logger of your choice, <c>emerge</c> it and have it added
6638 to the default runlevel using <c>rc-update</c>. The following example installs
6639 <c>syslog-ng</c>. Of course substitute with your system logger:
6640 </p>
6641
6642 <pre caption="Installing a system logger">
6643 # <i>emerge syslog-ng</i>
6644 # <i>rc-update add syslog-ng default</i>
6645 </pre>
6646
6647 </body>
6648 </section>
6649 <section>
6650 <title>Optional: Cron Daemon</title>
6651 <body>
6652
6653 <p>
6654 Next is the cron daemon. Although it is optional and not required for your
6655 system, it is wise to install one. But what is a cron daemon? A cron daemon
6656 executes scheduled commands. It is very handy if you need to execute some
6657 command regularly (for instance daily, weekly or monthly).
6658 </p>
6659
6660 <p>
6661 We only provide <c>vixie-cron</c> for networkless installations. If you want
6662 another cron daemon you can wait and install it later on.
6663 </p>
6664
6665 <pre caption="Installing a cron daemon">
6666 # <i>emerge vixie-cron</i>
6667 # <i>rc-update add vixie-cron default</i>
6668 </pre>
6669
6670 </body>
6671 </section>
6672 <section>
6673 <title>Optional: File Indexing</title>
6674 <body>
6675
6676 <p>
6677 If you want to index your system's files so you are able to quickly
6678 locate them using the <c>locate</c> tool, you need to install
6679 <c>sys-apps/slocate</c>.
6680 </p>
6681
6682 <pre caption="Installing slocate">
6683 # <i>emerge slocate</i>
6684 </pre>
6685
6686 </body>
6687 </section>
6688 <section>
6689 <title>File System Tools</title>
6690 <body>
6691
6692 <p>
6693 Depending on what file systems you are using, you need to install the necessary
6694 file system utilities (for checking the filesystem integrity, creating
6695 additional file systems etc.).
6696 </p>
6697
6698 <p>
6699 The following table lists the tools you need to install if you use a certain
6700 file system. Not all filesystems are available for each and every architecture
6701 though.
6702 </p>
6703
6704 <table>
6705 <tr>
6706 <th>File System</th>
6707 <th>Tool</th>
6708 <th>Install Command</th>
6709 </tr>
6710 <tr>
6711 <ti>XFS</ti>
6712 <ti>xfsprogs</ti>
6713 <ti><c>emerge xfsprogs</c></ti>
6714 </tr>
6715 <tr>
6716 <ti>ReiserFS</ti>
6717 <ti>reiserfsprogs</ti>
6718 <ti><c>emerge reiserfsprogs</c></ti>
6719 </tr>
6720 <tr>
6721 <ti>JFS</ti>
6722 <ti>jfsutils</ti>
6723 <ti><c>emerge jfsutils</c></ti>
6724 </tr>
6725 </table>
6726
6727 <p>
6728 If you don't require any additional networking-related tools (such as rp-pppoe
6729 or a dhcp client) continue with <uri link="?part=1&amp;chap=10">Configuring the
6730 Bootloader</uri>.
6731 </p>
6732
6733 </body>
6734 </section>
6735 <section>
6736 <title>Networking Tools</title>
6737 <subsection>
6738 <title>Optional: Installing a DHCP Client</title>
6739 <body>
6740
6741 <p>
6742 If you require Gentoo to automatically obtain an IP address for your network
6743 interface(s), you need to install <c>dhcpcd</c> (or any other DHCP Client)
6744 on your system. If you don't do this now, you might not be able to connect
6745 to the internet after the installation!
6746 </p>
6747
6748 <pre caption="Installing dhcpcd">
6749 # <i>emerge dhcpcd</i>
6750 </pre>
6751
6752 </body>
6753 </subsection>
6754 <subsection>
6755 <title>Optional: Installing a PPPoE Client</title>
6756 <body>
6757
6758 <p>
6759 If you need <c>rp-pppoe</c> to connect to the net, you need to install it.
6760 </p>
6761
6762 <pre caption="Installing rp-pppoe">
6763 # <i>USE="-X" emerge rp-pppoe</i>
6764 </pre>
6765
6766 <p>
6767 The <c>USE="-X"</c> will prohibit xorg-x11 to be installed as a dependency
6768 (<c>rp-pppoe</c> has graphical tools; if you want those enabled, you can
6769 recompile <c>rp-pppoe</c> later on or have xorg-x11 installed now -- which takes a
6770 long time to compile).
6771 </p>
6772
6773 <p>
6774 Now continue with <uri link="?part=1&amp;chap=10">Configuring the
6775 Bootloader</uri>.
6776 </p>
6777
6778 </body>
6779 </subsection>
6780 </section>
6781 </sections>
6782
6783
6784
6785 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-bootloader.xml
6786
6787 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
6788 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-bootloader.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
6789
6790 Index: hb-install-x86-bootloader.xml
6791 ===================================================================
6792 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
6793 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
6794
6795 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
6796 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
6797
6798 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-bootloader.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
6799
6800 <sections>
6801
6802 <version>4.4</version>
6803 <date>2005-04-16</date>
6804
6805 <section>
6806 <title>Making your Choice</title>
6807 <subsection>
6808 <title>Introduction</title>
6809 <body>
6810
6811 <p>
6812 Now that your kernel is configured and compiled and the necessary system
6813 configuration files are filled in correctly, it is time to install a
6814 program that will fire up your kernel when you start the system. Such a
6815 program is called a <e>bootloader</e>. For x86, Gentoo Linux provides <uri
6816 link="#grub">GRUB</uri> and <uri link="#lilo">LILO</uri>. But before we
6817 install one of these two bootloaders, we inform you how to configure framebuffer
6818 (assuming you want it of course). With framebuffer you can run the Linux command
6819 line with (limited) graphical features (such as using the nice bootsplash
6820 image Gentoo provides).
6821 </p>
6822
6823 </body>
6824 </subsection>
6825 <subsection>
6826 <title>Optional: Framebuffer</title>
6827 <body>
6828
6829 <p>
6830 <e>If</e> you have configured your kernel with framebuffer support (or you used
6831 <c>genkernel</c>'s default kernel configuration), you can activate it by adding
6832 a <c>vga</c> and/or a <c>video</c> statement to your bootloader configuration
6833 file.
6834 </p>
6835
6836 <p>
6837 First of all you need to know what type of framebuffer device you're using. If
6838 you use a Gentoo patched kernel tree (such as <c>gentoo-sources</c>) you will
6839 have had the possibility of selecting <c>vesafb-tng</c> as the <e>VESA driver
6840 type</e> (which is default for these kernel sources). If this is the case, you
6841 are using <c>vesafb-tng</c> and do not need to set a <c>vga</c> statement.
6842 Otherwise you are using the <c>vesafb</c> driver and need to set the <c>vga</c>
6843 statement.
6844 </p>
6845
6846 <p>
6847 The <c>vga</c> statement controls the resolution and color depth of your
6848 framebuffer screen for <c>vesafb</c>. As stated in
6849 <path>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt</path> (which gets installed
6850 when you install a kernel source package), you need to pass the VESA number
6851 corresponding to the requested resolution and color depth to it.
6852 </p>
6853
6854 <p>
6855 The following table lists the available resolutions and colordepths and matches
6856 those against the value that you need to pass on to the <c>vga</c> statement.
6857 </p>
6858
6859 <table>
6860 <tr>
6861 <ti></ti>
6862 <th>640x480</th>
6863 <th>800x600</th>
6864 <th>1024x768</th>
6865 <th>1280x1024</th>
6866 </tr>
6867 <tr>
6868 <th>256</th>
6869 <ti>0x301</ti>
6870 <ti>0x303</ti>
6871 <ti>0x305</ti>
6872 <ti>0x307</ti>
6873 </tr>
6874 <tr>
6875 <th>32k</th>
6876 <ti>0x310</ti>
6877 <ti>0x313</ti>
6878 <ti>0x316</ti>
6879 <ti>0x319</ti>
6880 </tr>
6881 <tr>
6882 <th>64k</th>
6883 <ti>0x311</ti>
6884 <ti>0x314</ti>
6885 <ti>0x317</ti>
6886 <ti>0x31A</ti>
6887 </tr>
6888 <tr>
6889 <th>16M</th>
6890 <ti>0x312</ti>
6891 <ti>0x315</ti>
6892 <ti>0x318</ti>
6893 <ti>0x31B</ti>
6894 </tr>
6895 </table>
6896
6897 <p>
6898 The <c>video</c> statement controls framebuffer display options. It needs to be
6899 given the framebuffer driver (<c>vesafb</c> for 2.6 kernels, or <c>vesa</c> for
6900 2.4 kernels) followed by the control statements you wish to enable. All
6901 variables are listed in <path>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/fb/vesafb.txt</path>,
6902 but we'll inform you about three most-used options:
6903 </p>
6904
6905 <table>
6906 <tr>
6907 <th>Control</th>
6908 <th>Description</th>
6909 </tr>
6910 <tr>
6911 <ti>ywrap</ti>
6912 <ti>
6913 Assume that the graphical card can wrap around its memory (i.e. continue at
6914 the beginning when it has approached the end)
6915 </ti>
6916 </tr>
6917 <tr>
6918 <ti>mtrr</ti>
6919 <ti>
6920 Setup MTRR registers
6921 </ti>
6922 </tr>
6923 <tr>
6924 <ti><c>mode</c></ti>
6925 <ti>
6926 (<c>vesafb-tng</c> only)<br/>
6927 Set up the resolution, color depth and refresh rate. For instance,
6928 <c>1024x768-32@85</c> for a resolution of 1024x768, 32 bit color depth and a
6929 refresh rate of 85 Hz.
6930 </ti>
6931 </tr>
6932 </table>
6933
6934 <p>
6935 The result of those two statements could be something like <c>vga=0x318
6936 video=vesafb:mtrr,ywrap</c> or <c>video=vesafb:mtrr,ywrap,1024x768-32@85</c>.
6937 Remember (or write down) this setting; you will need it shortly.
6938 </p>
6939
6940 <p>
6941 Now continue by installing <uri link="#grub">GRUB</uri> <e>or</e> <uri
6942 link="#lilo">LILO</uri>.
6943 </p>
6944
6945 </body>
6946 </subsection>
6947 </section>
6948 <section id="grub">
6949 <title>Default: Using GRUB</title>
6950 <subsection>
6951 <title>Understanding GRUB's terminology</title>
6952 <body>
6953
6954 <p>
6955 The most critical part of understanding GRUB is getting comfortable with
6956 how GRUB refers to hard drives and partitions. Your Linux partition
6957 <path>/dev/hda1</path> will most likely be called <path>(hd0,0)</path> under
6958 GRUB. Notice the parenthesis around the <path>hd0,0</path> - they are required.
6959 </p>
6960
6961 <p>
6962 Hard drives count from zero rather than "a" and partitions start at zero
6963 rather than one. Be aware too that with the hd devices, only hard drives are
6964 counted, not atapi-ide devices such as cdrom players and burners. Also, the
6965 same construct is used with scsi drives. (Normally they get higher numbers
6966 than ide drives except when the bios is configured to boot from scsi devices.)
6967 When you ask the BIOS to boot from a different hard disk (for instance your
6968 primary slave), <e>that</e> harddisk is seen as <path>hd0</path>.
6969 </p>
6970
6971 <p>
6972 Assuming you have a hard drive on <path>/dev/hda</path>, a cdrom player on
6973 <path>/dev/hdb</path>, a burner on <path>/dev/hdc</path>, a second hard drive
6974 on <path>/dev/hdd</path> and no SCSI hard drive, <path>/dev/hdd7</path> gets
6975 translated to <path>(hd1,6)</path>. It might sound tricky and tricky it is
6976 indeed, but as we will see, GRUB offers a tab completion mechanism
6977 that comes handy for those of you having a lot of hard drives and
6978 partitions and who are a little lost in the GRUB numbering scheme.
6979 </p>
6980
6981 <p>
6982 Having gotten the feel for that, it is time to install GRUB.
6983 </p>
6984
6985 </body>
6986 </subsection>
6987 <subsection>
6988 <title>Installing GRUB</title>
6989 <body>
6990
6991
6992
6993
6994 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-disk.xml
6995
6996 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
6997 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-disk.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
6998
6999 Index: hb-install-x86-disk.xml
7000 ===================================================================
7001 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
7002 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
7003
7004 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
7005 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/2.5 -->
7006
7007 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-disk.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
7008
7009 <sections>
7010
7011 <version>4.2</version>
7012 <date>2005-08-02</date>
7013
7014 <section>
7015 <title>Introduction to Block Devices</title>
7016 <subsection>
7017 <title>Block Devices</title>
7018 <body>
7019
7020 <p>
7021 We'll take a good look at disk-oriented aspects of Gentoo Linux
7022 and Linux in general, including Linux filesystems, partitions and block devices.
7023 Then, once you're familiar with the ins and outs of disks and filesystems,
7024 you'll be guided through the process of setting up partitions and filesystems
7025 for your Gentoo Linux installation.
7026 </p>
7027
7028 <p>
7029 To begin, we'll introduce <e>block devices</e>. The most famous block device is
7030 probably the one that represents the first IDE drive in a Linux system, namely
7031 <path>/dev/hda</path>. If your system uses SCSI or SATA drives, then your
7032 first hard drive would be <path>/dev/sda</path>.
7033 </p>
7034
7035 <p>
7036 The block devices above represent an abstract interface to the disk. User
7037 programs can use these block devices to interact with your disk without worrying
7038 about whether your drives are IDE, SCSI or something else. The program can
7039 simply address the storage on the disk as a bunch of contiguous,
7040 randomly-accessible 512-byte blocks.
7041 </p>
7042
7043 </body>
7044 </subsection>
7045 <subsection>
7046 <title>Partitions</title>
7047 <body>
7048
7049 <p>
7050 Although it is theoretically possible to use a full disk to house your Linux
7051 system, this is almost never done in practice. Instead, full disk block devices
7052 are split up in smaller, more manageable block devices. On x86 systems,
7053 these are called <e>partitions</e>.
7054 </p>
7055
7056 <p>
7057 Partitions are divided in three types:
7058 <e>primary</e>, <e>extended</e> and <e>logical</e>.
7059 </p>
7060
7061 <p>
7062 A <e>primary</e> partition is a partition which has its information stored in
7063 the MBR (master boot record). As an MBR is very small (512 bytes) only four
7064 primary partitions can be defined (for instance, <path>/dev/hda1</path> to
7065 <path>/dev/hda4</path>).
7066 </p>
7067
7068 <p>
7069 An <e>extended</e> partition is a special primary partition (meaning the
7070 extended partition must be one of the four possible primary partitions) which
7071 contains more partitions. Such a partition didn't exist originally, but as
7072 four partitions were too few, it was brought to life to extend the formatting
7073 scheme without losing backward compatibility.
7074 </p>
7075
7076 <p>
7077 A <e>logical</e> partition is a partition inside the extended partition. Their
7078 definitions aren't placed inside the MBR, but are declared inside the extended
7079 partition.
7080 </p>
7081
7082 </body>
7083 </subsection>
7084 <subsection>
7085 <title>Advanced Storage</title>
7086 <body>
7087
7088 <p>
7089 The x86 Installation CDs provide support for EVMS and LVM2. EVMS and LVM2
7090 increase the flexibility offered by your partitioning setup. During the
7091 installation instructions, we will focus on "regular" partitions, but it is
7092 still good to know EVMS and LVM2 are supported as well.
7093 </p>
7094
7095 </body>
7096 </subsection>
7097 </section>
7098 <section>
7099 <title>Designing a Partitioning Scheme</title>
7100 <subsection>
7101 <title>Default Partitioning Scheme</title>
7102 <body>
7103
7104 <p>
7105 If you are not interested in drawing up a partitioning scheme for your system,
7106 you can use the partitioning scheme we use throughout this book:
7107 </p>
7108
7109 <table>
7110 <tr>
7111 <th>Partition</th>
7112 <th>Filesystem</th>
7113 <th>Size</th>
7114 <th>Description</th>
7115 </tr>
7116 <tr>
7117 <ti><path>/dev/hda1</path></ti>
7118 <ti>ext2</ti>
7119 <ti>32M</ti>
7120 <ti>Boot partition</ti>
7121 </tr>
7122 <tr>
7123 <ti><path>/dev/hda2</path></ti>
7124 <ti>(swap)</ti>
7125 <ti>512M</ti>
7126 <ti>Swap partition</ti>
7127 </tr>
7128 <tr>
7129 <ti><path>/dev/hda3</path></ti>
7130 <ti>ext3</ti>
7131 <ti>Rest of the disk</ti>
7132 <ti>Root partition</ti>
7133 </tr>
7134 </table>
7135
7136 <p>
7137 If you are interested in knowing how big a partition should be, or even how
7138 many partitions you need, read on. Otherwise continue now with partitioning
7139 your disk by reading <uri link="#fdisk">Using fdisk to Partition your
7140 Disk</uri>.
7141 </p>
7142
7143 </body>
7144 </subsection>
7145 <subsection>
7146 <title>How Many and How Big?</title>
7147 <body>
7148
7149 <p>
7150 The number of partitions is highly dependent on your environment. For instance,
7151 if you have lots of users, you will most likely want to have your
7152 <path>/home</path> separate as it increases security and makes backups easier.
7153 If you are installing Gentoo to perform as a mailserver, your
7154 <path>/var</path> should be separate as all mails are stored inside
7155 <path>/var</path>. A good choice of filesystem will then maximise your
7156 performance. Gameservers will have a separate <path>/opt</path> as most gaming
7157 servers are installed there. The reason is similar for <path>/home</path>:
7158 security and backups. You will definitely want to keep <path>/usr</path> big:
7159 not only will it contain the majority of applications, the Portage tree alone
7160 takes around 500 Mbyte excluding the various sources that are stored in it.
7161 </p>
7162
7163 <p>
7164 As you can see, it very much depends on what you want to achieve. Separate
7165 partitions or volumes have the following advantages:
7166 </p>
7167
7168 <ul>
7169 <li>
7170 You can choose the best performing filesystem for each partition or volume
7171 </li>
7172 <li>
7173 Your entire system cannot run out of free space if one defunct tool is
7174 continuously writing files to a partition or volume
7175 </li>
7176 <li>
7177 If necessary, file system checks are reduced in time, as multiple checks can
7178 be done in parallel (although this advantage is more with multiple disks than
7179 it is with multiple partitions)
7180 </li>
7181 <li>
7182 Security can be enhanced by mounting some partitions or volumes read-only,
7183 nosuid (setuid bits are ignored), noexec (executable bits are ignored) etc.
7184 </li>
7185 </ul>
7186
7187 <p>
7188 However, multiple partitions have one big disadvantage: if not configured
7189 properly, you might result in having a system with lots
7190 of free space on one partition and none on another. There is also a 15-partition
7191 limit for SCSI and SATA.
7192 </p>
7193
7194 <p>
7195 As an example partitioning, we show you one for a 20GB disk, used as a
7196 demonstration laptop (containing webserver, mailserver, gnome, ...):
7197 </p>
7198
7199 <pre caption="Filesystem usage example">
7200
7201
7202
7203 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-kernel.xml
7204
7205 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
7206 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-kernel.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
7207
7208 Index: hb-install-x86-kernel.xml
7209 ===================================================================
7210 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
7211 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
7212
7213 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
7214 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
7215
7216 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-kernel.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
7217
7218 <sections>
7219
7220 <version>4.9</version>
7221 <date>2005-07-04</date>
7222
7223 <section>
7224 <title>Timezone</title>
7225 <body>
7226
7227 <p>
7228 You first need to select your timezone so that your system knows where it is
7229 located. Look for your timezone in <path>/usr/share/zoneinfo</path>, then make a
7230 symlink to <path>/etc/localtime</path> using <c>ln</c>:
7231 </p>
7232
7233 <pre caption="Setting the timezone information">
7234 # <i>ls /usr/share/zoneinfo</i>
7235 <comment>(Suppose you want to use GMT)</comment>
7236 # <i>ln -sf /usr/share/zoneinfo/GMT /etc/localtime</i>
7237 </pre>
7238
7239 </body>
7240 </section>
7241 <section>
7242 <title>Installing the Sources</title>
7243 <subsection>
7244 <title>Choosing a Kernel</title>
7245 <body>
7246
7247 <p>
7248 The core around which all distributions are built is the Linux kernel. It is the
7249 layer between the user programs and your system hardware. Gentoo provides its
7250 users several possible kernel sources. A full listing with description is
7251 available at the <uri link="/doc/en/gentoo-kernel.xml">Gentoo Kernel
7252 Guide</uri>.
7253 </p>
7254
7255 <p>
7256 For x86-based systems, our main supported kernel is named
7257 <c>gentoo-sources</c>. This kernel is based on the official Linux sources, but
7258 has security, stability, compatibility and bug fixes applied on top.
7259 Alternatively, the plain and unpatched Linux sources are supplied through the
7260 <c>vanilla-sources</c> package.
7261 </p>
7262
7263 <p>
7264 Both kernel sources are based on the official 2.6 kernel sources. If you
7265 want to install a 2.4-based kernel, you will need to install Gentoo with a
7266 working Internet connection as we do not supply these sources on our
7267 Installation CD.
7268 </p>
7269
7270 <p>
7271 Choose your kernel source and install it using <c>emerge</c>.
7272 </p>
7273
7274 <pre caption="Installing a kernel source">
7275 # <i>emerge gentoo-sources</i>
7276 </pre>
7277
7278 <p>
7279 When you take a look in <path>/usr/src</path> you should see a symlink called
7280 <path>linux</path> pointing to your kernel source. We will assume the kernel
7281 source installed is <c>gentoo-sources-2.6.11-r3</c>:
7282 </p>
7283
7284 <pre caption="Viewing the kernel source symlink">
7285 # <i>ls -l /usr/src/linux</i>
7286 lrwxrwxrwx 1 root root 12 Oct 13 11:04 /usr/src/linux -&gt; linux-2.6.11-gentoo-r3
7287 </pre>
7288
7289 <p>
7290 If the symlink doesn't point to the kernel source of your choice (note that
7291 <c>linux-2.6.11-gentoo-r3</c> is merely an example) you should change it to the
7292 right kernel:
7293 </p>
7294
7295 <pre caption="Changing the kernel source symlink">
7296 # <i>rm /usr/src/linux</i>
7297 # <i>cd /usr/src</i>
7298 # <i>ln -s linux-2.6.11-gentoo-r3 linux</i>
7299 </pre>
7300
7301 <p>
7302 Now it is time to configure and compile your kernel source. You
7303 can use <c>genkernel</c> for this, which will build a generic kernel as used
7304 by the Installation CD. We explain the "manual" configuration first though, as
7305 it is the best way to optimize your environment.
7306 </p>
7307
7308 <p>
7309 If you want to manually configure your kernel, continue now with <uri
7310 link="#manual">Default: Manual Configuration</uri>. If you want to use
7311 <c>genkernel</c> you should read <uri link="#genkernel">Alternative: Using
7312 genkernel</uri> instead.
7313 </p>
7314
7315 </body>
7316 </subsection>
7317 </section>
7318 <section id="manual">
7319 <title>Default: Manual Configuration</title>
7320 <subsection>
7321 <title>Introduction</title>
7322 <body>
7323
7324 <p>
7325 Manually configuring a kernel is often seen as the most difficult procedure a
7326 Linux user ever has to perform. Nothing is less true -- after configuring a
7327 couple of kernels you don't even remember that it was difficult ;)
7328 </p>
7329
7330 <p>
7331 However, one thing <e>is</e> true: you must know your system when you start
7332 configuring a kernel manually. Most information can be gathered by emerging
7333 pciutils (<c>emerge pciutils</c>) which contains <c>lspci</c>. You will now
7334 be able to use <c>lspci</c> within the chrooted environment. You may safely
7335 ignore any <e>pcilib</e> warnings (like pcilib: cannot open
7336 /sys/bus/pci/devices) that <c>lspci</c> throws out. Alternatively, you can run
7337 <c>lspci</c> from a <e>non-chrooted</e> environment. The results are the same.
7338 You can also run <c>lsmod</c> to see what kernel modules the Installation CD
7339 uses (it might provide you with a nice hint on what to enable).
7340 </p>
7341
7342 <p>
7343 Now go to your kernel source directory and execute <c>make menuconfig</c>. This
7344 will fire up an ncurses-based configuration menu.
7345 </p>
7346
7347 <pre caption="Invoking menuconfig">
7348 # <i>cd /usr/src/linux</i>
7349 # <i>make menuconfig</i>
7350 </pre>
7351
7352 <p>
7353 You will be greeted with several configuration sections. We'll first list some
7354 options you must activate (otherwise Gentoo will not function, or not function
7355 properly without additional tweaks).
7356 </p>
7357
7358 </body>
7359 </subsection>
7360 <subsection>
7361 <title>Activating Required Options</title>
7362 <body>
7363
7364 <p>
7365 Make sure that every driver that is vital to the booting of your system (such as
7366 SCSI controller, ...) is compiled <e>in</e> the kernel and not as a module,
7367 otherwise your system will not be able to boot completely.
7368 </p>
7369
7370 <p>
7371 Now select the correct processor family:
7372 </p>
7373
7374 <pre caption="General Support and processor family">
7375 General setup ---&gt;
7376 [*] Support for hot-pluggable devices
7377 Processor type and features ---&gt;
7378 Subarchitecture Type (PC-compatible) ---&gt;
7379 <comment>(Change according to your system)</comment>
7380 (<i>Athlon/Duron/K7</i>) Processor family
7381 </pre>
7382
7383 <p>
7384 Now go to <c>File Systems</c> and select support for the filesystems you use.
7385 <e>Don't</e> compile them as modules, otherwise your Gentoo system will not be
7386 able to mount your partitions. Also select <c>/proc file system</c> and
7387 <c>Virtual memory</c>. Do <e>not</e> select the <c>/dev file system</c>.
7388 </p>
7389
7390 <pre caption="Selecting necessary file systems">
7391 File systems ---&gt;
7392 Pseudo Filesystems ---&gt;
7393 &lt;*&gt; /proc file system support
7394 &lt; &gt; /dev file system support (OBSOLETE)
7395 &lt;*&gt; Virtual memory file system support (former shm fs)
7396
7397
7398 <comment>(Select one or more of the following options as needed by your system)</comment>
7399 &lt;*&gt; Reiserfs support
7400 &lt;*&gt; Ext3 journalling file system support
7401 &lt;*&gt; JFS filesystem support
7402 &lt;*&gt; Second extended fs support
7403 &lt;*&gt; XFS filesystem support
7404 </pre>
7405
7406 <p>
7407 Do not forget to enable DMA for your drives:
7408 </p>
7409
7410
7411
7412 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-medium.xml
7413
7414 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
7415 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-medium.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
7416
7417 Index: hb-install-x86-medium.xml
7418 ===================================================================
7419 <?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
7420 <!DOCTYPE sections SYSTEM "/dtd/book.dtd">
7421
7422 <!-- The content of this document is licensed under the CC-BY-SA license -->
7423 <!-- See http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-sa/1.0 -->
7424
7425 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/hb-install-x86-medium.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
7426
7427 <sections>
7428
7429 <version>4.2</version>
7430 <date>2005-05-23</date>
7431
7432 <section>
7433 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
7434 <subsection>
7435 <title>Introduction</title>
7436 <body>
7437
7438 <p>
7439 Before we start, we first list what hardware requirements you need to
7440 successfully install Gentoo on your box.
7441 </p>
7442
7443 </body>
7444 </subsection>
7445 <subsection>
7446 <title>Hardware Requirements</title>
7447 <body>
7448
7449 <table>
7450 <tr>
7451 <th>CPU</th>
7452 <ti>i486 or later</ti>
7453 </tr>
7454 <tr>
7455 <th>Memory</th>
7456 <ti>64 MB</ti>
7457 </tr>
7458 <tr>
7459 <th>Diskspace</th>
7460 <ti>1.5 GB (excluding swap space)</ti>
7461 </tr>
7462 <tr>
7463 <th>Swap space</th>
7464 <ti>At least 256 MB</ti>
7465 </tr>
7466 </table>
7467
7468
7469 </body>
7470 </subsection>
7471 </section>
7472 <!-- General description, propagated to other architectures as well -->
7473 <!-- START -->
7474 <section>
7475 <title>The Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
7476 <subsection>
7477 <title>Introduction</title>
7478 <body>
7479
7480 <p>
7481 Gentoo Linux can be installed using one of three <e>stage</e> tarball files. A
7482 stage file is a tarball (compressed archive) that contains a minimal
7483 environment.
7484 </p>
7485
7486 <ul>
7487 <li>
7488 A stage1 file contains nothing more than a compiler, Portage (Gentoo's
7489 software management system) and a couple of packages on which the
7490 compiler or Portage depends.
7491 </li>
7492 <li>
7493 A stage2 file contains a so-called bootstrapped system, a minimal
7494 environment from which one can start building all other necessary
7495 applications that make a Gentoo environment complete.
7496 </li>
7497 <li>
7498 A stage3 file contains a prebuilt minimal system which is almost fully
7499 deployable. It only lacks a few applications where you, the Gentoo user,
7500 needs to choose which one you want to install.
7501 </li>
7502 </ul>
7503
7504 <p>
7505 We will opt for a stage3 installation throughout this document. If you want to
7506 perform a Gentoo installation using the stage1 or stage2 files, please use the
7507 installation instructions in the <uri
7508 link="/doc/en/handbook/handbook-x86.xml">Gentoo Handbook</uri>. They do
7509 require a working Internet connection though.
7510 </p>
7511
7512 </body>
7513 </subsection>
7514 <subsection>
7515 <title>Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
7516 <body>
7517
7518 <p>
7519 An Installation CD is a bootable medium which contains a self-sustained Gentoo
7520 environment. It allows you to boot Linux from the CD. During the boot process
7521 your hardware is detected and the appropriate drivers are loaded. The Gentoo
7522 Installation CDs are maintained by Gentoo developers.
7523 </p>
7524
7525 <p>
7526 There currently are two Installation CDs available:
7527 </p>
7528
7529 <ul>
7530 <li>
7531 The Universal Installation CD contains everything you need to install
7532 Gentoo. It provides stage3 files for common architectures, source code
7533 for the extra applications you need to choose from and, of course, the
7534 installation instructions for your architecture.
7535 </li>
7536 <li>
7537 The Minimal Installation CD contains only a minimal environment that allows
7538 you to boot up and configure your network so you can connect to the
7539 Internet. It does not contain any additional files and cannot be used
7540 during the current installation approach.
7541 </li>
7542 </ul>
7543
7544 <p>
7545 Gentoo also provides a Package CD. This is no Installation CD but an additional
7546 resource that you can exploit during the installation of your Gentoo system. It
7547 contains prebuilt packages (the so-called GRP set) that allows you to easily
7548 and quickly install additional applications (such as OpenOffice.org, KDE,
7549 GNOME, ...) immediately after the Gentoo installation and right before you
7550 update your Portage tree.
7551 </p>
7552
7553 <p>
7554 The use of the Package CD is covered later in this document.
7555 </p>
7556
7557 </body>
7558 </subsection>
7559 </section>
7560 <!-- STOP -->
7561 <section>
7562 <title>Download, Burn and Boot the Gentoo Universal Installation CD</title>
7563 <subsection>
7564 <title>Downloading and Burning the Installation CD</title>
7565 <body>
7566
7567 <p>
7568 You can download the Universal Installation CDs (and, if you want to, the
7569 Packages CD as well) from one of our <uri
7570 link="/main/en/mirrors.xml">mirrors</uri>. The Installation CDs are located in
7571 the <path>releases/x86/2005.0/installcd</path> directory;
7572 the Package CDs are located in the <path>releases/x86/2005.0/packagecd</path>
7573 directory.
7574 </p>
7575
7576 <p>
7577 i686, athlon-xp, pentium3 and pentium4 Package CDs are available via
7578 <uri link="http://torrents.gentoo.org">BitTorrent</uri>.
7579 </p>
7580
7581 <p>
7582 Inside those directories you'll find so-called ISO-files. Those are full CD
7583 images which you can write on a CD-R.
7584 </p>
7585
7586 <p>
7587 After downloading the file, you can verify its integrity to see if it is
7588 corrupted or not:
7589 </p>
7590
7591 <ul>
7592 <li>
7593 You can check its MD5 checksum and compare it with the MD5 checksum we
7594 provide (for instance with the <c>md5sum</c> tool under Linux/Unix or
7595 <uri link="http://www.etree.org/md5com.html">md5sum</uri> for Windows)
7596 </li>
7597 <li>
7598 You can verify the cryptographic signature that we provide. You need to
7599 obtain the public key we use (17072058) before you proceed though.
7600 </li>
7601 </ul>
7602
7603 <p>
7604 To fetch our public key using the GnuPG application, run the following command:
7605 </p>
7606
7607 <pre caption="Obtaining the public key">
7608 $ <i>gpg --keyserver pgp.mit.edu --recv-keys 17072058</i>
7609 </pre>
7610
7611 <p>
7612 Now verify the signature:
7613 </p>
7614
7615 <pre caption="Verify the cryptographic signature">
7616 $ <i>gpg --verify &lt;signature file&gt; &lt;downloaded iso&gt;</i>
7617 </pre>
7618
7619
7620
7621 1.1 xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/index.xml
7622
7623 file : http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/index.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/x-cvsweb-markup&cvsroot=gentoo
7624 plain: http://www.gentoo.org/cgi-bin/viewcvs.cgi/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/index.xml?rev=1.1&content-type=text/plain&cvsroot=gentoo
7625
7626 Index: index.xml
7627 ===================================================================
7628 <?xml version='1.0' encoding="UTF-8"?>
7629 <!DOCTYPE guide SYSTEM "/dtd/guide.dtd">
7630
7631 <!-- $Header: /var/cvsroot/gentoo/xml/htdocs/doc/en/handbook/2005.1/index.xml,v 1.1 2005/08/08 13:16:10 swift Exp $ -->
7632
7633 <guide link="index.xml">
7634 <title>Gentoo 2005.0 Handbook</title>
7635
7636 <author title="Author">
7637 <mail link="swift@g.o">Sven Vermeulen</mail>
7638 </author>
7639
7640 <abstract>
7641 The Gentoo 2005.0 Handbook contains the networkless installation instructions
7642 for the 2005.0 release and parts on working with Gentoo and Portage.
7643 </abstract>
7644
7645 <license/>
7646
7647 <version>4.2</version>
7648 <date>2005-07-26</date>
7649
7650 <chapter>
7651 <title>The Gentoo Linux 2005.0 Handbooks</title>
7652 <!-- Uncomment when needed, probably for the 2005.0 versions -->
7653 <!--
7654 <section>
7655 <title>Available languages</title>
7656 <body>
7657
7658 <p>
7659 The Gentoo Linux 2005.0 Handbook is available in the following languages:
7660 </p>
7661
7662 <p>
7663 <uri link="/doc/da/handbook">Danish</uri> |
7664 <uri link="/doc/de/handbook">German</uri> |
7665 <uri link="/doc/en/handbook">English</uri> |
7666 <uri link="/doc/fr/handbook">French</uri> |
7667 <uri link="/doc/id/handbook">Indonesian</uri> |
7668 <uri link="/doc/it/handbook">Italian</uri> |
7669 <uri link="/doc/ja/handbook">Japanese</uri> |
7670 <uri link="/doc/pl/handbook">Polish</uri> |
7671 <uri link="/doc/ro/handbook">Romanian</uri> |
7672 <uri link="/doc/es/handbook">Spanish</uri> |
7673 <uri link="/doc/zh_tw/handbook">Traditional Chinese</uri>
7674 </p>
7675
7676 </body>
7677 </section>
7678 -->
7679 <section>
7680 <title>Introduction</title>
7681 <body>
7682
7683 <p>
7684 Welcome to the Gentoo Linux 2005.0 Handbooks. These handbooks are released
7685 together with the Gentoo Linux releases and contain the necessary installation
7686 instructions to install Gentoo Linux 2005.0 <brite>without an internet
7687 connection.</brite>
7688 </p>
7689
7690 <p>
7691 However, if you want to install Gentoo Linux using the latest versions of all
7692 available packages, please use the Installation Instructions in the <uri
7693 link="/doc/en/handbook/index.xml">Gentoo Linux Handbook</uri> for your
7694 architecture.
7695 </p>
7696
7697 </body>
7698 </section>
7699 </chapter>
7700 <chapter>
7701 <title>View the Handbook</title>
7702 <section>
7703 <body>
7704
7705 <table>
7706 <tr>
7707 <th>Format</th>
7708 <th>Description</th>
7709 <th>Links</th>
7710 </tr>
7711 <tr>
7712 <ti>HTML</ti>
7713 <ti>One page per chapter, perfect for online viewing</ti>
7714 <ti>
7715 <uri link="handbook-x86.xml">x86</uri>,
7716 <uri link="handbook-sparc.xml">sparc</uri>,
7717 <uri link="handbook-alpha.xml">alpha</uri>,
7718 <uri link="handbook-amd64.xml">amd64</uri>,
7719 <uri link="handbook-ppc.xml">ppc</uri>
7720 <!-- <uri link="handbook-hppa.xml">hppa</uri> -->
7721 </ti>
7722 </tr>
7723 <tr>
7724 <ti>HTML</ti>
7725 <ti>All in one page</ti>
7726 <ti>
7727 <uri link="handbook-x86.xml?full=1">x86</uri>,
7728 <uri link="handbook-sparc.xml?full=1">sparc</uri>,
7729 <uri link="handbook-alpha.xml?full=1">alpha</uri>,
7730 <uri link="handbook-amd64.xml?full=1">amd64</uri>,
7731 <uri link="handbook-ppc.xml?full=1">ppc</uri>
7732 <!-- <uri link="handbook-hppa.xml?full=1">hppa</uri> -->
7733 </ti>
7734 </tr>
7735 <tr>
7736 <ti>HTML</ti>
7737 <ti>All in one page, printable version</ti>
7738 <ti>
7739 <uri link="handbook-x86.xml?style=printable&amp;full=1">x86</uri>,
7740 <uri link="handbook-sparc.xml?style=printable&amp;full=1">sparc</uri>,
7741 <uri link="handbook-alpha.xml?style=printable&amp;full=1">alpha</uri>,
7742 <uri link="handbook-amd64.xml?style=printable&amp;full=1">amd64</uri>,
7743 <uri link="handbook-ppc.xml?style=printable&amp;full=1">ppc</uri>
7744 <!-- <uri link="handbook-hppa.xml?style=printable&amp;full=1">hppa</uri> -->
7745 </ti>
7746 </tr>
7747 </table>
7748
7749
7750 </body>
7751 </section>
7752 </chapter>
7753 </guide>
7754
7755
7756
7757 --
7758 gentoo-doc-cvs@g.o mailing list